library water infiltration mitigation · proj. no.: de-11-035-rb-008 texas woman’s university...

PROJECT MANUAL FOR

CONSTRUCTION

FPC Project No. DE-11-035-RB-008 FS2008-11-000 (SG 00811.000)

LIBRARY WATER INFILTRATION MITIGATION

Texas Woman’s University Denton, Texas

JUNE 16, 2011

06/16/11

Architect SmithGroup|F&S

8350 N. Central Expwy., Suite 500 Dallas, Texas 75206

Phone (214) 559-4851

PROJECT DIRECTORY

TEXAS WOMAN’S UNIVERSITY Library Water Infiltration Mitigation

Denton, Texas DATE 06/16/11 OWNER TEXAS WOMAN’S UNIVERSITY P. O. Box 425619 Denton, Texas 76204 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVER TEXAS WOMAN’S UNIVERSITY P. O. Box 425619 Denton, Texas 76204

940-898-3143 voice; 940-898-3148 facsimile Contact(s): Steve Adcock, [email protected] ARCHITECT OF RECORD SMITHGROUP|F&S 8350 North Central Expressway, Suite 500 Dallas, Texas 75206

214-559-4851 voice; 214-526-7237 facsimile Contact(s): Jay Rambo, [email protected] CIVIL ENGINEER JASTER-QUINTANILLA DALLAS, LLP 2105 Commerce Street, Suite 300 Dallas, Texas 75201

214-752-9098 voice; 214-752-8771 facsimile Contact(s): Richard Akin, [email protected] Curtis Bouldin, [email protected]

mailto:[email protected]




PROJ. NO.: DE-11-035-RB-008 TEXAS WOMAN’S UNIVERSITY FS2008-11-000 (SG 00811.000) LIBRARY WATER INFILTRATION MITIGATION 06/16/11

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 1

SECTION 000110

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION SECTION TITLE ISSUE DATE

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

---------- Project Directory ................................................................................... 06/16/11 000010 Table Of Contents ................................................................................ 06/16/11 ---------- Architectural Seals Page ...................................................................... 06/16/11 ---------- Civil Seals Page ................................................................................... 06/16/11 DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS ---------- Proposal Form ...................................................................................... 06/16/11 ---------- Contract Agreement ............................................................................. 06/16/11 ---------- Performance Bond ................................................................................ 06/16/11 ---------- Payment Bond ...................................................................................... 06/16/11 ---------- Uniform General Conditions for Construction Contracts ...................... 06/16/11 ---------- TWU Supplementary General Conditions ............................................ 06/16/11 ---------- TWU Special Conditions ....................................................................... 06/16/11 ---------- HUB Subcontracting Plan (HSP) Instructions ...................................... 06/16/11 ---------- HUB Subcontracting Plan (HSP) .......................................................... 06/16/11 ---------- HUB Subcontracting Plan (HSP) Continuation Sheets ........................ 06/16/11 ---------- HUB Subcontracting Plan (HSP) Prime Contractor Progress Assessment Report ............................................................................. 06/16/11 ---------- Prevailing Wage Rates ......................................................................... 06/16/11 006325 Substitution Request Form ................................................................... 06/16/11 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 Summary .............................................................................................. 06/16/11 012000 Price and Payment Procedures ............................................................ 06/16/11 012100 Allowances ............................................................................................ 06/16/11 013000 Administrative Requirements ................................................................ 06/16/11 013216 Construction Progress Schedule .......................................................... 06/16/11 014000 Quality Requirements ........................................................................... 06/16/11 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls ........................................................ 06/16/11 015100 Temporary Utilities ................................................................................ 06/16/11 016000 Product Requirements .......................................................................... 06/16/11 017000 Execution and Closeout Requirements ................................................ 06/16/11 017800 Closeout Submittals .............................................................................. 06/16/11 DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 042000.01 Individual Brick Replacement ............................................................... 06/16/11 042000.02 Masonry Restoration ............................................................................ 06/16/11 DIVISION 05 - METALS 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing ................................................................. 06/16/11 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 Thermal Insulation ................................................................................ 06/16/11 072500 Weather Barriers .................................................................................. 06/16/11 076500 Adhered Membrane Masonry Flashing ................................................ 06/16/11 079005.01 Joint Sealers ......................................................................................... 06/16/11 079005.02 Recaulking Movement Joints ................................................................ 06/16/11

PROJ. NO.: DE-11-035-RB-008 TEXAS WOMAN’S UNIVERSITY FS2008-11-000 FITNESS AND RECREATION CENTER 08/31/2009

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 2

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 088000.01 Wet-Sealing of Window Frames ........................................................... 06/16/11 088000.02 Glass Cleaning ..................................................................................... 06/16/11 DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies .................................................................. 06/16/11 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 311000 Site Preparation and Demolition ........................................................... 06/16/11 312200 Earthwork .............................................................................................. 06/16/11 312333 Trench Excavation ................................................................................ 06/16/11 312334 Trench Backfill ...................................................................................... 06/16/11 313116 Termite Control ..................................................................................... 06/16/11 DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321313 Concrete Paving ................................................................................... 06/16/11 DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 334000 Storm Drainage Utilities ........................................................................ 06/16/11

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

1

ARCHITECTURAL SEALS PAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

---------- Project Directory 000010 Table Of Contents ---------- Architectural Seals Page ---------- Civil Seals Page DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS ---------- Proposal Form ---------- Contract Agreement ---------- Performance Bond ---------- Payment Bond ---------- Uniform General Conditions for Construction Contracts ---------- TWU Supplementary General Conditions ---------- TWU Special Conditions ---------- HUB Subcontracting Plan (HSP) Instructions ---------- HUB Subcontracting Plan (HSP) ---------- HUB Subcontracting Plan (HSP) Continuation Sheets ---------- HUB Subcontracting Plan (HSP) Prime Contractor Progress Assessment Report ---------- Prevailing Wage Rates 006325 Substitution Request Form DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 Summary 012000 Price and Payment Procedures 012100 Allowances 013000 Administrative Requirements 013216 Construction Progress Schedule 014000 Quality Requirements 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 015100 Temporary Utilities 015300 Mold Prevention Measures 016000 Product Requirements 017000 Execution and Closeout Requirements 017800 Closeout Submittals DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 042000.01 Individual Brick Replacement 042000.02 Masonry Restoration DIVISION 05 - METALS 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071900 Water Repellent Vertical Walls 072100 Thermal Insulation 072500 Weather Barriers 076500 Adhered Membrane Masonry Flashing

2

079005.01 Joint Sealers 079005.02 Recaulking Movement Joints DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 088000.01 Wet-Sealing of Window Frames 088000.02 Glass Cleaning DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 313116 Termite Control

06/16/11

June 16, 2011 Proposal Form - 1 Library Water Infiltration Mitigation

PROPOSAL FORM for

LIBRARY WATER INFILTRATION MITIGATION TEXAS WOMAN'S UNIVERSITY DENTON CAMPUS

PROJECT NO. DE-11-035-RB-008 Name of Offeror Date of Proposal To: Board of Regents (Owner) Texas Woman's University Denton, Texas PURSUANT TO AND IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUEST TO PROVIDE A COMPETITVE SEALED PROPOSAL, AND THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS RELATING TO: PROJECT NO. DE-07-102-NP-067, FITNESS AND RECREATION CENTER. The undersigned, having examined the drawings and specifications with related documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed work, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, material, equipment, and supplies and to fully perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, within the time set forth herein, and at the price set forth below. These prices are to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the Contract Documents of which this proposal is a part. In submitting this proposal, the Offeror agrees: 1. To hold my Proposal open through the sixtieth (60th) day following the day for submitting this

Proposal. 2. To accept the provisions of the Instructions to Offerors regarding disposition of Proposal Security. 3. To enter into and execute an Agreement if awarded on the basis of this Proposal, and to furnish

Performance and Payment Bonds in accordance with the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions.

4. To accomplish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 5. To furnish to the Owner within 72 hours of the time of the proposal opening a breakdown of the

proposal price separating the cost of materials to be incorporated into the real property from the cost of all other labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the work. (To be furnished by selected Best Value Offeror only.)

ADDENDA The Offeror further agrees, and acknowledges, the following Addenda have been received and that the entire contents have been incorporated into this Proposal: No. , dated No. , dated


No. , dated No. , dated PROPOSAL ITEMS: It is the intention of the Owner to award the contract for this project on the basis of the Best Value Proposal for which funds are available and as may be accepted by the Owner. Each proposal item shall include all labor, materials, services and equipment necessary to perform all the Work and General Conditions items as described in the contract documents. The following lump sum prices shall be the basis of total compensation for furnishing and installing each item of work, complete in place: BASE PRICING:

BASE PRICING COST INCLUDES ALL WORK AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS:

BASE PRICE: ( $ )

OWNER’S CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE: ( $ 30,000.00 )

TOTAL BASE PRICE: ( $ )

**Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words will govern. Total Base Price amount shall include the Owner’s Construction Contingency Allowance. TIME FOR COMPLETION OR LIQUIDATED DAMAGES The undersigned agrees to complete all of the work, ready for the Owner's acceptance no later than ______________________ (Contractor insert date) as set forth in the Special Conditions, and fully realizing that the Contract will carry liquidated damages provisions. PARTICIPATION BY HISTORICALLY UNDERUTILIZED BUSINESSES:

The Offeror agrees that, if awarded the Contract, it will have “Historically Underutilized Businesses,” as that term is defined in the HUB PARTICIPATION PROGRAM section of the Request for Proposals, participate in the Work to the extent indicated below. Such participation in the Work means that amounts equal to or greater than the stated percentages of the total contract amount will be paid to such Historically Underutilized Businesses for work done under Subcontract, for the supply of materials to be incorporated in the Work, and (if the Offeror itself is a Historically Underutilized Business) for work accomplished by the Offeror with its own forces. Double counting shall be avoided. A. If an award is issued, do you plan to utilize a subcontractor for all or any portion of the contract?

Yes No B. If yes, what percentage of work will be subcontracted with a HUB? % C. If “no” to question A above, explain below, or in a separate document, why no subcontracting

opportunities are available or what efforts were made to subcontract part of this project? D. Are you certified as a Texas HUB? ___Yes ___No GSC VID/Certificate No.: ADDITIONAL PROPOSAL CONDITIONS: Under Section 231.006, Family Code (Relating to Child Support), the Offeror certifies that the individual or business entity named in this proposal is not ineligible to receive the specified payment and


acknowledges that this contract may be terminated and payment may be withheld if this certification is inaccurate. If the paragraph above is applicable, provide name and social security number of each person with at least 25% ownership. Offerors that have pre-registered this information on the GSC centralized master offerors list have satisfied this requirement. By signature of this proposal, offeror certifies that the corporation is in good standing with all requirements of Chapter 171, State of Texas Tax Code, regarding Franchise Tax as defined in the Tex. Bus. Corp. Act Ann art. 2.45 (Vernon Supp. 1996). I am an agent of the Proposal Firm named below, authorized to submit this Proposal. A copy of current Power of Attorney is attached certifying agent's authority to bind Offerors. (If required). Signed and notarized Affidavit form is attached. PROPOSING FIRM By: SEAL IF INCORPORATED (TITLE) ADDRESS: Phone: Fax:

June 16, 2011 Contract Agreement - 1 Library Water Infiltration Mitigation

CONTRACT AGREEMENT 1. The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor will be executed on the Owner's Standard

Form TWU A202. .

June 16, 2011 Performance Bond-1 Library Water Infiltration Mitigation

PERFORMANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LET IT BE KNOWN BY THIS INSTRUMENT: That we, as Principal, and we, , a corporation duly authorized to do business in this State, as Surety(s), are this date held and firmly bound unto the State of Texas in the amount of Dollars $ for the payment of which indemnity the said Principal and Surety, by this declaration, do firmly bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and individually. Since a Contract, which by reference is made a part hereof, exists between the Principal and the State of Texas, acting by and through the State Purchasing and General Services Commission, and dated for the , the conditions of this obligation are, therefore, such that it shall remain in full force and effect unless and until the Principal shall faithfully perform the Contract in accordance with the Contract Documents. In the event of Principal's failure, as defined by the Contract Documents, to faithfully perform the Contract, Surety(s) will within fifteen (15) days of determination of default, assume full responsibility for completion of said Contract and become entitled to payment of the balance of the Contract amount. The liabilities, rights, limitations, and remedies concerning this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Article 5160, Vernon's Texas Civil Statutes pursuant to which this Bond is executed. IN WITNESS TO THIS DECLARATION, the said Principal and Surety(s) have signed and sealed this instrument this day of . PRINCIPAL SURETY By By ____________________ Bond Identification No. Address of Attorney-in-Fact (Use of this form for the purposes indicated has been approved by the Attorney General of Texas)

June 16, 2011 Payment Bond- 1 Library Water Infiltration Mitigation

PAYMENT BOND STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LET IT BE KNOWN BY THIS INSTRUMENT: That we, as Principal, and we, , a corporation duly authorized to do business in this State, as Surety(s), are this date held and firmly bound unto the State of Texas in the amount of Dollars $ for the payment of which indemnity the said Principal and Surety, by this declaration, do firmly bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and individually. Since a Contract, which by reference is made a part hereof, exists between the Principal and the State of Texas, acting by and through the State Purchasing and General Services Commission, and dated for the , the conditions of this obligation are, therefore, such that it shall remain in full force and effect unless and until the Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in the said Contract. The liabilities, rights, limitations, and remedies concerning this Bond, made solely for the protection of claimants as defined by Article 5160, Vernon's Texas Civil Statutes, shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute, pursuant to which this Bond is executed. IN WITNESS TO THIS DECLARATION, the said Principal and Surety(s) have signed and sealed this instrument this day of . PRINCIPAL SURETY By By ____________________ Bond Identification No. Address of Attorney-in-Fact

(Use of this form for the purposes indicated has been approved by the Attorney General of Texas)

June 16, 2011 Uniform General Conditions - 1 Library Water Infiltration Mitigation

Uniform General Conditions

for

Construction Contracts

August 17, 2005

Adopted by the Texas Building and Procurement Commission

as of September 21, 2005


Table of Contents

Article 1. Definitions ………………………………………………………………..….. 3 Article 2. Laws Governing Construction ……………………………………….….…. 5 Article 3. General Responsibilities of Owner & Contractor …………………….….. 7 Article 4. Historically Underutilized Business (HUB) Subcontracting Plan …..…. 11 Article 5. Bonds & Insurance …………………………………………………….….. 12 Article 6. Contract Documents ………………………………………………….…… 16 Article 7. Construction Safety .............................................................................. 18 Article 8. Quality Control...................................................................................... 19 Article 9. Construction Schedules........................................................................ 24 Article 10. Payments............................................................................................ 28 Article 11. Changes ............................................................................................. 31 Article 12. Project Completion and Acceptance................................................... 34 Article 13. Warranty and Guarantee.................................................................... 38 Article 14. Suspension and Termination ............................................................. 39 Article 15. Dispute Resolution.............................................................................. 42 Article 16. Miscellaneous..................................................................................... 42


2005 Edition Uniform General Conditions

Article 1. Definitions Unless the context clearly requires another meaning, the following terms have the meaning assigned herein. 1.1 Architect/Engineer (A/E) means a person registered as an architect pursuant to Tex. Occ. Code

Ann., Chapter 1051, as a landscape architect pursuant to Tex. Occ. Code Ann., Chapter 1052, a person licensed as a professional engineer pursuant Tex. Occ. Code Ann., Chapter 1001 and/or a firm employed by Owner or Design-Build Contractor to provide professional architectural or engineering services and to exercise overall responsibility for the design of a Project or a significant portion thereof, and to perform the contract administration responsibilities set forth in the Contract.

1.2 Change Order means a written modification of the Contract between the Owner and Contractor,

signed by the Owner, the Contractor and the Architect/Engineer. 1.3 Change Order Proposal means a Contractor-generated document in response to a Change

Order Request (COR). 1.4 Change Order Request (COR) means a document which informs the contractor of a proposed

change in the Work, and appropriately describes or otherwise documents such change. 1.5 Close-out documents means the product brochures, product/equipment maintenance and

operations instructions, manuals, and other documents/warranties, as-built record documents, affidavit of payment, release of lien and claim, and as may be further defined, identified, and required by the Contract Documents.

1.6 Contract means the entire agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, including all of the

Contract Documents. 1.7 Contract Date is the date when the agreement between the owner and the contractor becomes

effective. 1.8 Contract Documents means those documents identified as a component of the agreement

(contract) between the owner and the contractor. These may include, but are not limited to, Drawings, Specifications, General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, and all pre-bid and/or pre-proposal addenda.

1.9 Contractor means the individual, corporation, company, partnership, firm or other entity

contracted to perform the Work, regardless of the type of construction contract used, so that the term as used herein includes a Construction Manager-at-Risk or a Design-Build firm as well as a General or Prime Contractor. The contract documents refer to Contractor as if singular in number.

1.10 Contract Sum means the total compensation payable to the Contractor for completion of the

Work in accordance with the terms of the contract. 1.11 Contract Time means the period between the Start Date identified in the Notice to Proceed with

Construction and the Substantial Completion date identified in the Notice to Proceed or as subsequently amended by Change Order.


1.12 Date of Commencement means the date designated in the Notice to Proceed for the Contractor to commence the Work.

1.13 Day means a calendar day, unless otherwise specifically stipulated. 1.14 Drawings means that product of the Architect/Engineer which graphically depicts the Work. 1.15 Final Completion means the date determined and certified by the Architect/Engineer and Owner

on which the Work is fully and satisfactorily complete in accordance with the Contract. 1.16 Owner means the State of Texas and any Agency of the State of Texas, acting through the

responsible entity of the State of Texas identified in the Contract as the Owner. 1.17 Owner’s Designated Representative (ODR) means the individual assigned by the Owner to act

on its behalf, and to undertake certain activities as specifically outlined in the Contract. The ODR is the only party authorized to direct changes to the scope, cost, or time of the contract.

1.18 Project means all activities necessary for realization of the Work. This includes design, contract

award(s), execution of the Work itself, and fulfillment of all contract and warranty obligations. 1.19 Samples means representative physical examples of materials, equipment or workmanship, used

to confirm compliance with requirements and/or to establish standards for use in execution of the Work.

1.20 Schedule of Values means the detailed breakdown of the cost of the materials, labor and

equipment necessary to accomplish the Work as described in the Contract Documents, submitted by Contractor for approval by Owner and Architect/Engineer.

1.21 Shop Drawings means the drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts,

brochures and other data prepared by the Contractor or its agents, which detail a portion of the Work.

1.22 Site means the geographical area of the location of the Work. 1.23 Special Conditions means the documents containing terms and conditions, which may be unique

to the project. Special Conditions are a part of the Contract Documents and have precedence over the Uniform General Conditions.

1.24 Specifications means the written product of the Architect/Engineer that establishes the quality

and/or performance of products utilized in the Work and processes to be used, including testing and verification for producing the Work.

1.25 Subcontractor means a business entity that enters into an agreement with the Contractor to

perform part of the Work or to provide services, materials or equipment for use in the Work. 1.26 Substantial Completion means the date determined and certified by the Contractor,

Architect/Engineer and Owner when the Work or a designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract, so as to be operational and fit for the use intended.

1.27 Supplementary General Conditions means procedures and requirements that modify the Uniform

General Conditions. Supplementary General Conditions, when used, have precedence over the Uniform General Conditions.


1.28 Unit Price Work means Work or a portion of the Work paid for based on incremental units of measurement.

1.29 Unilateral Change Order (ULCO) means a Change Order issued by the Owner without the

agreement of the Contractor. 1.30 Work means the administration, procurement, materials, equipment, construction and all services

necessary for the Contractor, and/or its agents, to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract.

Article 2. Laws Governing Construction 2.1 Environmental Regulations. The Contractor shall conduct activities in compliance with

applicable laws and regulations and other requirements of the Contract relating to the environment, and its protection at all times. Unless otherwise specifically determined, the Owner is responsible for obtaining and maintaining permits related to storm water run-off. The Contractor shall conduct operations consistent with storm water run-off permit conditions. Contractor is responsible for all items it brings to site, including hazardous materials, and all such items brought to the site by its subcontractors and suppliers, or by other entities subject to direction of the Contractor. The Contractor shall not incorporate hazardous materials into the Work without prior approval of Owner, and shall provide an affidavit attesting to such in association with request for Substantial Completion inspection.

2.2 Wage Rates. The Contractor shall not pay less than the wage scale of the various classes of

labor as shown on the “Prevailing Wage Schedule” provided by the Owner. The specified wage rates are minimum rates only. The Owner is not bound to pay any claims for additional compensation made by any Contractor because the Contractor pays wages in excess of the applicable minimum rate contained in the Contract. The “Prevailing Wage Schedule” is not a representation that qualified labor adequate to perform the Work is available locally at the prevailing wage rates.

2.2.1 Notification to Workers. The Contractor shall notify each worker, in writing, of the

following as they commence work on the contract: the worker’s job classification, the established minimum wage rate requirement for that classification, as well as the worker’s actual wage. The notice must be delivered to and signed in acknowledgement of receipt by the employee and must list both the wages and fringe benefits to be paid or furnished for each classification in which the worker is assigned duties. When requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish evidence of compliance with the Texas Prevailing Wage Law.

2.2.1.1 Submit a copy of each worker wage-rate notification to the ODR with the

application for progress payment for the period during which the worker was engaged in activities on behalf of the project.

2.2.1.2 The “Prevailing Wage Schedule” is determined by the Owner in compliance with

Tex. Gov’t Code, Chapter 2258. Should the Contractor at any time become aware that a particular skill or trade not reflected on the Owner’s Prevailing Wage Schedule will be or is being employed in the Work, whether by the Contractor or by a subcontractor, the Contractor shall promptly inform the ODR of the proposed wage to be paid for the skill along with a justification for same. The Contractor is responsible for determining the most appropriate wage for a particular skill in relation to similar skills or trades identified on the Prevailing Wage Schedule. In no case shall any worker be paid less than the wage


indicated for Laborers.

2.2.1.3 Penalty for Violation. The Contractor and any Subcontractor will pay to the State a penalty of sixty dollars ($60) for each worker employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Prevailing Wage Schedule.

2.2.1.4 Complaints of Violations

2.2.1.4.1 Owner’s Determination of Good Cause. Upon receipt of information

concerning a violation of Tex. Gov’t Code, Chapter 2258, the Owner will, within 31 days, make an initial determination as to whether good cause exists that a violation occurred. The Owner will send documentation of the initial determination to the Contractor against whom the violation was alleged, and to the worker involved. Upon making a good cause finding, the Owner will retain the full amounts claimed by the claimant or claimants as the difference between wages paid and wages due under the Prevailing Wage Schedule and any supplements thereto, together with the applicable penalties, such amounts being subtracted from successive progress payments pending a final decision on the violation.

2.2.1.4.2 If the Contractor and claimant worker reach an agreement concerning the claim,

the contractor shall promptly notify the Owner in a written document countersigned by the worker.

2.2.1.4.3 Arbitration Required. If the violation is not resolved within 14 days following initial

determination by the Owner, the Contractor and the claimant worker must participate in binding arbitration in accordance with the Texas General Arbitration Act, Tex. Civ. Prac. & Rev. Code, Chapter 171. For a period not to exceed 10 days, after which, if no agreement reached, a district court may be petitioned by any of the parties to the arbitration to appoint an arbitrator whose decision will be binding on all parties.

2.2.1.4.4 Arbitration Award. If an arbitrator assesses an award against the Contractor, the

Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of said award to the Owner. The Owner may use any amounts retained under Article 2.2.1.4.1 to pay the worker the amount as designated in the arbitration award. If the retained funds are insufficient to pay the worker in accordance with the arbitration award, the worker has a right of action against the Contractor, and/or the surety to receive the amount owed, plus attorneys’ fees and court costs. The Owner has no duty to release any funds to either the claimant or the Contractor until it has received the notices of agreement or the arbitration award.

2.2.1.4.5 No Extension of Time. If the Owner’s determination proves valid that good cause

existed to believe a violation had occurred, the Contractor is not entitled to an extension of time for any delay arising directly or indirectly from of the arbitration procedures set forth herein.

2.3 Venue for Suits. The venue for any suit arising from this contract will be in a court of competent

jurisdiction in Travis County, Texas, or as may otherwise designated in the Supplementary General Conditions.

2.4 Licensing of Trades. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of state law

related to license requirements for skilled tradesmen, contractors, suppliers and or laborers, as


necessary to accomplish the Work. In the event the Contractor, or one of its Subcontractors, loses its license during the term of performance of the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly hire or contract with a licensed provider of the service at no additional cost to the Owner.

2.5 Royalties, Patents & Copyrights. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, defend

all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof.

2.6 State Sales and Use Taxes. The Owner qualifies for exemption from certain State and Local

Sales and Use Taxes pursuant to the provisions of Tex. Tax Code, Chapter 151. The Contractor may claim exemption from payment of applicable State taxes by complying with such procedures as prescribed by the State Comptroller of Public Accounts.

Article 3. General Responsibilities of Owner & Contractor 3.1 Owner’s General Responsibilities. The Owner is the entity identified as such in the Contract and

referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.

3.1.1 Preconstruction Conference. Prior to, or concurrent with, the issuance of Notice to Proceed with Construction, a conference will be convened for attendance by the Owner, Contractor, Architect/Engineer (AE) and appropriate Subcontractors. The purpose of the conference is to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work, the operational conditions at the project site, and general administration of the Project. Topics include communications, schedules, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, maintaining required records and all other matters of importance to the administration of the Project and effective communications between the project team members.

3.1.2 Owner’s Designated Representative. Prior to the start of construction, Owner will identify

the Owner’s Designated Representative (ODR), who has the express authority to act and bind the Owner to the extent and for the purposes described in the various Articles of the Contract, including responsibilities for general administration of the Contract.

3.2.1.1 Unless otherwise specifically defined elsewhere in the contract documents, the

ODR is the single point of contact between the Owner and Contractor. Notice to the ODR, unless otherwise noted, constitutes notice to the Owner under the Contract.

3.2.1.2 All directives on behalf of the Owner will be conveyed to the Contractor by the

ODR in writing.

3.1.3 Owner Supplied Materials and Information.

3.1.3.1 The Owner will furnish to the Contractor those surveys describing the physical characteristics, legal description, limitations of the site, site utility locations, and other information used in the preparation of the Contract Documents.

3.1.3.2 The Owner will provide information, equipment, or services under the Owner’s

control to the Contractor with reasonable promptness.

3.1.4 Availability of Lands. The Owner will furnish, as indicated in the Contract, all required rights to use the lands upon which the Work occurs. This includes rights-of-way and easements for access and such other lands that are designated for use by the


Contractor. The Contractor shall comply with all Owner identified encumbrances or restrictions specifically related to use of lands so furnished. The Owner will obtain and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities, unless otherwise required in the Contract Documents.

3.1.5 Limitation on Owner’s Duties

3.1.5.1 The Owner will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be

responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, technologies, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto. The Owner is not responsible for any failure of Contractor to comply with laws and regulations applicable to the Work. The Owner is not responsible for the failure of Contractor to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, suppliers or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work on behalf of the Contractor.

3.1.5.2 The Owner will not take any action in contravention of a design decision made by

the AE in preparation of the Contract Documents, when such actions are in conflict with statutes under which the AE is licensed for the protection of the public health and safety.

3.2 Role of Architect/Engineer. Unless specified otherwise in the Contract between the Owner and

the Contractor, the AE shall provide general administration services for the Owner during the construction phase of the project. Written correspondence, requests for information, and shop drawings/submittals shall be directed to the AE for action. The AE has the authority to act on behalf of the Owner to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument, which will be furnished to the Contractor by the ODR, upon request.

3.2.1 Site Visits

3.2.1.1 The AE will make visits to the site at intervals as provided in the AE’s contract

agreement with the Owner, to observe the progress and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work and report findings to the Owner.

3.2.1.2 The AE has the authority to interpret Contract Documents and inspect the Work

for compliance and conformance with the Contract. Except as referenced in Article 3.1.5.2, the Owner retains the sole authority to accept or reject Work and issue direction for correction, removal, or replacement of Work.

3.2.2 Clarifications and Interpretations. It may be determined that clarifications or

interpretations of the Contract Documents are necessary. Upon direction by the ODR such clarifications or interpretations will be provided by the AE consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. The AE will issue these clarifications with reasonable promptness to the Contractor as Architect’s Supplemental Instruction (ASI) or similar instrument. If Contractor believes that such clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, the Contractor shall so notify the Owner in accordance with the provisions of Article 11.

3.2.3 Limitations on Architect/Engineer Authority. The AE is not responsible for:

3.2.3.1 The Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, procedures, safety,

or programs incident to the Project nor will the AE supervise, direct, control or


have authority over the same.

3.2.3.2 The Failure of Contractor to comply with laws and regulations applicable to the furnishing or performing the Work.

3.2.3.3 The Contractor’s failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the

Contract Documents.

3.2.3.4 Acts or omissions of the Contractor, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work.

3.3 Contractor’s General Responsibilities. The Contractor is solely responsible for implementing the

Work in full compliance with all applicable laws and the contract documents and shall supervise and direct the Work using the best skill and attention to assure that each element of the Work conforms to the Contract requirements. The Contractor is solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, safety, sequences, coordination and procedures.

3.3.1 Project Administration. The Contractor shall provide project administration for all subcontractors, vendors, suppliers, and others involved in implementing the Work and shall coordinate administration efforts with those of the AE and ODR in accordance with these General Conditions and provisions of Division 1 Specifications, and as outlined in the Pre-construction Conference.

3.3.2 Contractor’s Superintendent. Employ a competent resident superintendent who will be

present at the Project Site during the progress of the Work. The superintendent is subject to the approval of the ODR. Do not change approved superintendents during the course of the project without the written approval of the ODR unless the superintendent leaves the employ of the Contractor.

3.3.3 Labor. Provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay-out, and construct

the Work as required by the Contract Documents. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site at all times.

3.3.4 Services, Materials, and Equipment. Unless otherwise specified, provide and assume full

responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities, incidentals, and services necessary for the construction, performance, testing, start-up, inspection and completion of the Work.

3.3.5 Non-Compliant Work. Should the AE and/or the ODR identify Work as non-compliant

with the Contract Documents, the ODR will communicate the finding to the Contractor and the Contractor will correct such Work at its expense. The approval of Work by either the AE or ODR does not relieve the Contractor from the obligation to comply with all requirements of the Contract Documents.

3.3.6 Subcontractors. Do not employ any Subcontractor, supplier or other person or

organization, whether initially or as a substitute, against whom the Owner may have reasonable objection. The Owner will communicate such objections in writing. The Contractor is not required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier or other person or organization to furnish any of the work to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. The Contractor will not substitute Subcontractors without the acceptance of the Owner.


3.3.6.1 All Subcontracts and supply contracts shall be consistent with and bound to the

terms and conditions of the Contract Documents including provisions of the Agreement between the Contractor and the Owner.

3.3.6.2 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the

Work of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with the Contractor. Require all Subcontractors, suppliers and such other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Owner only through the Contractor. Furnish to the Owner a copy of each first-tier subcontract promptly after its execution. The Contractor agrees that the Owner has no obligation to review or approve the content of such contracts and that providing the Owner such copies in no way relieves the Contractor of any of the terms and conditions of the Contract, including, without limitation, any provisions of the Contract which require the subcontractor to be bound to the Contractor in the same manner in which the Contractor is bound to the Owner.

3.3.7 Continuing the Work. Carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all

disputes, disagreements or alternative resolution processes with the Owner. Do not delay or postpone any Work because of the pending resolution of any disputes, disagreements or processes, except as the Owner and the Contractor may agree in writing.

3.3.8 Cleaning. At all times, keep the Site and the Work clean and free from accumulation of

waste materials or rubbish caused by the construction activities under the Contract. The Contractor shall ensure that the entire Project is thoroughly cleaned prior to requesting Substantial Completion Inspection and, again, upon completion of the Project prior to the final inspection.

3.3.9 Acts and Omissions of Contractor, its Subcontractors and Employees. The Contractor is

responsible for acts and omissions of his employees and all its subcontractors, their agents and employees. The Owner may, in writing, require the Contractor to remove from the Project any of Contractor’s or its subcontractor’s employees that the ODR finds to be careless, incompetent, or otherwise objectionable.

3.3.10 Indemnification of Owner. The Contractor covenants and agrees to FULLY INDEMNIFY

and HOLD HARMLESS, the Owner and the elected officials, employees, officers, directors, volunteers, and representatives of the Owner, individually or collectively, from and against any and all costs, claims, liens, damages, losses, expenses, fees, fines, penalties, proceedings, actions, demands, causes of action, liability and suits of any kind and nature, including but not limited to, personal or bodily injury, death and property damage, made upon the Owner directly or indirectly arising out of, resulting from or related to Contractor’s activities under this Contract, including any acts or omissions of Contractor, any agent, officer, director, representative, employee, consultant or the Subcontractor of Contractor, and their respective officers, agents, employees, directors and representatives while in the exercise of performance of the rights or duties under this Contract. The indemnity provided for in this paragraph does not apply to any liability resulting from the negligence of the Owner, officers or employees, separate Contractors or assigned contractors, in instances where such negligence causes personal injury, death or property damage. IN THE EVENT CONTRACTOR AND OWNER ARE FOUND JOINTLY LIABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION, LIABILITY WILL BE APPORTIONED COMPARATIVELY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF TEXAS, WITHOUT WAIVING ANY GOVERNMENTAL IMMUNITY AVAILABLE TO THE STATE UNDER TEXAS LAW AND WITHOUT WAIVING ANY


DEFENSES OF THE PARTIES UNDER TEXAS LAW.

3.3.10.1 The provisions of this Indemnification are solely for the benefit of the parties hereto and not intended to create or grant any rights, contractual or otherwise, to any other person or entity.

3.3.10.2 Promptly advise the Owner in writing of any claim or demand against the Owner

or the Contractor known to the Contractor related to or arising out of the Contractor’s activities under this Contract.

3.3.11 Ancillary Areas. Operate and maintain operations and associated storage areas at the

site of the Work in accordance with the following:

3.3.11.1 Confine all Contractor operations, including storage of materials and employee parking upon the Site of Work, to areas designated by the Owner.

3.3.11.2 The Contractor may erect, at its own expense, temporary buildings that will

remain its property. Remove such buildings and associated utility service lines upon completion of the Work, unless the Contractor requests and the Owner provides written consent that it may abandon such buildings and utilities in place.

3.3.11.3 Use only established roadways or construct and use such temporary roadways

as may be authorized by the Owner. Do not allow load limits of vehicles to exceed the limits prescribed by appropriate regulations or law. Provide protection to road surfaces, curbs, sidewalks, trees, shrubbery, sprinkler systems, drainage structures and other like existing improvements to prevent damage and repair any damage thereto at the expense of the Contractor.

3.3.11.4 The Owner may restrict the Contractor's entry to the site to specifically assigned

entrances and routes.

3.3.12 Separate Contracts. Additional Contractor responsibilities when the Owner awards separate Contracts

3.3.12.1 The Owner reserves the right to award other contracts in connection with other

portions of the Project under these or similar contract conditions.

3.3.12.2 The Owner reserves the right to perform operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces.

3.3.12.3 Under a system of separate contracts, the conditions described herein continue

to apply except as may be amended by change order. Article 4. Historically Underutilized Business (HUB) Subcontracting Plan 4.1 General Description. The purpose of the Historically Underutilized Business (HUB) Program is to

promote equal business opportunities for economically disadvantaged persons (as defined by Tex. Gov’t Code, Chapter 2161) to contract with the State of Texas in accordance with the goals specified in the State of Texas Disparity Study. The HUB Program annual procurement utilization goals per 1 Texas Administrative Code (TAC) §111.13 are: 11.9 percent for heavy construction other than building contracts, 26.1 percent for all building construction, including general contractors and operative builders contracts, 57.2 percent for all special trade construction contracts, 20 percent for professional services contracts, 33 percent for all other services contracts and 12.6 percent for


commodities contracts.

4.1.1 State agencies are required by statute to make a good faith effort to assist HUBs in participating in contract awards issued by the State. 1 TAC §111.11 111.28, outline the state's policy to encourage outreach to and potential utilization of HUBs in state contracting opportunities through race, ethnic and gender neutral means.

4.1.2 A Contractor who contracts with the State in an amount of $100,000 is required to make

a good faith effort to award subcontracts to HUBs in accordance with 1 TAC §111.14 by submitting a HUB Subcontracting Plan at the time of bidding and complying with the HUB Subcontracting Plan after it is accepted by the Owner and during the term of the contract.

4.2 Compliance with Approved HUB Subcontracting Plan. Contractor, having been awarded this

Contract in part by complying with the HUB Program statute and rules, hereby covenants to continue to comply with the HUB Program as follows:

4.2.1 Prior to substituting a Subcontractor, promptly notify the Owner in the event a change is

required for any reason to the accepted HUB Subcontracting Plan.

4.2.2 Conduct the good faith effort activities required and provide the Owner with necessary documentation to justify approval of a change to the approved HUB Subcontracting Plan.

4.2.3 Cooperate in the execution of a Change Order or such other approval of the change in

the HUB Subcontracting Plans as the Contractor and Owner may agree to.

4.2.4 Maintain and make available to Owner upon request business records documenting compliance with the accepted HUB Subcontracting Plan.

4.2.5 Upon receipt of payment for performance of Work, submit to Owner a compliance report,

in the format required by the Owner that demonstrates Contractor’s performance of the HUB Subcontracting Plan.

4.2.6 Promptly and accurately explain and provide supplemental information to Owner to assist

in the Owner’s investigation of the Contractor’s good faith effort to fulfill the HUB Subcontracting Plan and the requirements under 1 TAC §111.14.

4.3 Failure to Demonstrate Good Faith Effort. Upon a determination by Owner that Contractor has

failed to demonstrate a good faith effort to fulfill the HUB Subcontracting Plan or any contract covenant detailed above, the Owner may, in addition to all other remedies available to it, report the failure to perform to the Texas Building and Procurement Commission Vendor Performance and may bar the Contractor from future contracting opportunities with the Owner.

Article 5. Bonds & Insurance 5.1 Construction Bonds.

The Contractor is required to tender to Owner, prior to commencing the Work, performance and payment bonds, as required by Tex. Gov’t Code, Chapter 2253.

5.1.1 A Performance Bond is required if the Contract Price is in excess of $100,000. The

Performance Bond is solely for the protection of the Owner. The Performance Bond is to be for the Contract Sum to guarantee the faithful performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The form of the bond shall be approved by the Attorney General of Texas. The Performance Bond shall be effective through the Contractor’s


warranty period.

5.1.2 A Payment Bond is required if the Contract Price is in excess of $25,000. The payment bond is to be for the Contract Sum and is payable to the Owner solely for the protection and use of payment bond beneficiaries who have a direct contractual relationship with the Contractor or a Subcontractor. The form of the bond shall be approved by the Attorney General of Texas.

5.1.3 Bond Requirements. Each bond shall be executed by a corporate surety or sureties

authorized to do business in the State of Texas and acceptable to the Owner, on the Owner’s form, and in compliance with the relevant provisions of the Texas Insurance Code. If any bond is for more than 10 percent of the surety’s capital and surplus, the Owner may require certification that the company has reinsured the excess portion with one or more reinsurers authorized to do business in the State. A reinsurer may not reinsure for more than 10 percent of its capital and surplus. If a surety upon a bond loses its authority to do business in the State, the Contractor shall, within thirty (30) days after such loss, furnish a replacement bond at no added cost to the Owner.

5.1.4 Power of Attorney. Each bond shall be accompanied by a valid Power-of- Attorney (issued by the surety company and attached, signed and sealed with the corporate embosses seal, to the bond) authorizing the attorney in fact who signs the bond to commit the company to the terms of the bond, and stating any limit in the amount for which the attorney can issue a single bond.

5.1.5 Bond Indemnification. The process of requiring and accepting bonds and making claims

thereunder shall be conducted in compliance with Tex. Gov’t Code, Chapter 2253. IF FOR ANY REASON A STATUTORY PAYMENT OR PERFORMANCE BOND IS NOT HONORED BY THE SURETY, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FULLY INDEMNIFY AND HOLD THE OWNER HARMLESS OF AND FROM ANY COSTS, LOSSES, OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES IT INCURS AS A RESULT.

5.1.6 Furnishing Bond Information. Owner shall furnish certified copies of the payment bond

and the related Contract to any qualified person seeking copies who complies with Tex. Gov’t Code, §2253.026.

5.1.7 Claims on Payment Bonds. Claims on payment bonds must be sent directly to the

Contractor and his surety in accordance with Tex. Gov’t Code § 2253.041. All Payment Bond claimants are cautioned that no lien exists on the funds unpaid to the Contractor on such Contract, and that reliance on notices sent to the Owner may result in loss of their rights against the Contractor and/or his surety. The Owner is not responsible in any manner to a claimant for collection of unpaid bills, and accepts no such responsibility because of any representation by any agent or employee.

5.1.8 Payment Claims when Payment Bond not Required. The rights of §§53.231 – 53.239

when the value of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor is less than $25,000.00. These provisions set out the requirements for filing a valid lien on funds unpaid to the Contractor as of the time of filing the claim, actions necessary to release the lien Subcontractors regarding payment are governed by Tex. Prop. Code, and satisfaction of such claim.

5.1.9 Sureties shall be listed on the US Department of the Treasury’s Listing Approved

Sureties stating companies holding Certificates of Authority as acceptable sureties on Federal Bonds and acceptable reinsuring companies (Department Circular 570).

5.2 Insurance Requirements.


The Contractor shall carry insurance in the types and amounts indicated in this Article for the duration of the Contract. The required insurance shall include coverage for Owner’s property in the care, custody and control of Contractor prior to construction, during construction and during the warranty period. The insurance shall be evidenced by delivery to the Owner of certificates of insurance executed by the insurer or its authorized agent stating coverages, limits, expiration dates and compliance with all applicable required provisions. Upon request, the Owner, and/or its agents, shall be entitled to receive without expense, copies of the policies and all endorsements. The Contractor shall update all expired policies prior to submission for monthly payment. Failure to update policies shall be reason for withholding of payment until renewal is provided to the Owner.

5.2.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain the insurance coverage with the minimum

amounts described below until the end of the warranty period unless otherwise stated in Supplementary General Conditions. Failure to maintain insurance coverage, as required, is grounds for Suspension of Work for Cause pursuant to Article 14. The Contractor will be notified of the date on which the Builder’s Risk insurance policy may be terminated through Substantial Completion Notices, Acceptance Notices and/or other means as deemed appropriate by the Owner.

5.2.2 Coverage shall be written on an occurrence basis by companies authorized and admitted to do business in the State of Texas and rated A- or better by A.M. Best Company or otherwise acceptable to Owner.

5.2.2.1 Insurance coverage required includes:

5.2.2.1.1 Workers' Compensation. Insurance with limits as required by the Texas

Workers’ Compensation Act, with the policy endorsed to provide a waiver of subrogation as to the Owner, Employer's Liability insurance of not less than:

$100,000 each accident

$100,000 disease each employee $500,000 disease policy limit

5.2.2.1.2 Commercial General Liability Insurance. Including Independent

Contractor's liability, Products and Completed Operations and Contractual Liability, covering, but not limited to, the liability assumed under the indemnification provisions of this contract, fully insuring Contractor's (or Subcontractors) liability for bodily injury and property damage with a combined bodily injury (including death) and property damage minimum limit of :

$1,000,000 per occurrence

$1,000,000 general aggregate

$1,000,000 products and completed operations aggregate

Coverage shall be on an "occurrence" basis. The policy shall include coverage extended to apply to completed operations and explosion, collapse, underground hazards. The policy shall include endorsement CG2503 Amendment-Aggregate Limits of Insurance (Per Project) or its


equivalent.

5.2.2.1.3 Asbestos Abatement Liability Insurance, including coverage for liability arising from the encapsulation, removal, handling, storage, transportation, and disposal of asbestos containing materials. *This requirement applies if the Work or the Project includes asbestos containing materials. The Combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage will be a minimum of $1,000,000 per occurrence. *Specific Requirement for Claims-Made Form: Required period of coverage will be determined by the following formula: Continuous coverage for life of the contract, plus one (1) year (to provide coverage for the warranty period), and an extended discovery period for a minimum of five (5) years which shall begin at the end of the warranty period. If this contract is for asbestos abatement only, the All-Risk Builder's Risk or All-Risk Installation Floater (e) is not required.

5.2.2.1.4 Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance, covering owned, hired, and non-owned vehicles, with a combined bodily injury (including death) and property damage minimum limit of $1,000,000 per occurrence. No aggregate shall be permitted for this type of coverage. Such insurance is to include coverage for loading and unloading hazards.

5.5.2.1.5 All Risk Builder’s Risk Insurance (or All Risk Installation Floater for

instances in which the project involves solely the installation of equipment). Coverage shall be All-Risk, including, but not limited to, Fire, Extended Coverage, Vandalism and Malicious Mischief, Flood, Earthquake, Theft and damage resulting from faulty workmanship, design or materials. If Builder’s Risk, limit shall be equal to 100 percent of the contract. If Installation Floater, limit shall be equal to 100 percent of the contract cost. The policy shall be written jointly in the names of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and, Subcontractors shall be named as additional insured. The policy shall have endorsements as follows:

5.2.2.1.5.1 This insurance shall be specific as to coverage and not contributing

insurance with any permanent insurance maintained on the property.

5.2.2.1.5.2 This insurance shall not contain an occupancy clause suspending or reducing coverage should the Owner occupy, or begin beneficial occupancy before the Owner has accepted final completion.

5.2.2.1.5.3 Loss, if any, shall be adjusted with and made payable to the Owner as

Trustee for the insureds as their interests may appear; the right of subrogation under the Builder’s Risk policy shall be waived as to the Owner. The Owner shall be named as Loss Payee. For renovation projects or projects that involve portions of work contained within an existing structure, refer to Special Conditions for possible additional Builder’s Risk insurance requirements.

5.2.2.1.6 "Umbrella" Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain, pay for and


maintain umbrella liability insurance during the contract term, insuring the Contractor (or Subcontractor) for an amount of not less than amount specified in the Supplementary General Conditions or Special Conditions that provides coverage at least as broad as and applies in excess and follows form of the primary liability coverage required hereinabove. The policy shall provide "drop down" coverage where underlying primary insurance coverage limits are insufficient or exhausted. If this contract is for asbestos abatement only, the "Umbrella" Excess Liability is not required

5.2.3 Policies must include the following clauses, as applicable:

5.2.3.1 This insurance shall not be canceled, materially changed, or non-renewed until

after thirty (30) days prior written notice has been given to the Owner.

5.2.3.2 It is agreed that the Contractor’s insurance shall be deemed primary with respect to any insurance or self insurance carried by the Owner for liability arising out of operations under the Contract with the Owner.

5.2.3.3 The Owner, its officials, directors, employees, representatives, and volunteers are added as additional insureds as respects operations and activities of, or on behalf of the named insured performed under contract with the Owner. The additional insured status must cover completed operations as well. This is not applicable to the workers’ compensation policy.

5.2.3.4 The workers’ compensation and employers’ liability policy will provide a waiver of

subrogation in favor of the Owner.

5.2.4 Without limiting any of the other obligations or liabilities of the Contractor, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor performing work under the Contract, at the Subcontractor's own expense, to maintain during the term of the Contract, the same stipulated minimum insurance including the required provisions and additional policy conditions as shown above. As an alternative, the Contractor may include its Subcontractors as additional insureds on its own coverage as prescribed under these requirements. The Contractor's certificate of insurance shall note in such event that the Subcontractors are included as additional insureds and that Contractor agrees to provide Workers’ Compensation for the Subcontractors and their employees. The Contractor shall obtain and monitor the certificates of insurance from each Subcontractor in order to assure compliance with the insurance requirements. The Contractor must retain the certificates of insurance for the duration of the Contract plus 5 years and shall have the responsibility of enforcing these insurance requirements among its subcontractors. The Owner shall be entitled, upon request and without expense, to receive copies of these certificates.

5.2.5 Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage must meet the statutory requirements of

the Tex. Lab. Code, §401.011(44) and specific to construction projects for public entities as required by Tex. Lab. Code, §406.096.

Article 6. Contract Documents 6.1 Drawings and Specifications


6.1.1 Copies Furnished. The Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, the number of complete sets of the Drawings and Specifications as provided in the Supplementary General Conditions or Special Conditions. Additional complete sets of Drawings and Specifications, if requested, will be furnished at reproduction cost to the one requesting such additional sets.

6.1.2 Ownership of Drawings and Specifications. All Drawings, Specifications and copies

thereof furnished by the AE are to remain A/E’s property. These documents are not to be used on any other project, and with the exception of one Contract set for each party to the Contract, are to be returned to the Architect/Engineer, upon request, following completion of the Work.

6.1.3 Interrelation of Documents. The Contract Documents as referenced in the Agreement

between the Owner and the Contractor are complimentary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all.

6.1.4 Resolution of Conflicts in Documents. Where conflicts may exist between and/or within

the Contract Documents, the higher quality, greater quantity, more restrictive, and/or more expensive requirement shall be the basis of Contractor pricing, and the Contractor shall notify the AE and the ODR for resolution of the issue prior to executing the work in question.

6.1.5 Contractor's Duty to Review Contract Documents. In order to facilitate its responsibilities for completion of the Work in accordance with and as reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents, prior to pricing or commencing the Work, the Contractor shall examine and compare the Contract Documents, information furnished by the Owner, relevant field measurements made by the Contractor and any visible or reasonably anticipated conditions at the site affecting the Work. This duty extends throughout the construction phase prior to commencing each particular work activity and/or system installation.

6.1.6 Discrepancies and Omissions in Drawings and Specifications

6.1.6.1 Promptly report to the ODR and to the AE the discovery of any apparent error,

omission or inconsistency in the Contract Documents prior to execution of the Work.

6.1.6.2 It is recognized that the Contractor is not acting in the capacity of a licensed

design professional, unless it is performing as a Design-Build firm.

6.1.6.3 It is further recognized that the Contractor's examination of contract documents is to facilitate construction and does not create an affirmative responsibility to detect errors, omissions or inconsistencies or to ascertain compliance with applicable laws, building codes or regulations, unless it is performing as a Design-Build firm or a Construction Manager-at-Risk.

6.1.6.4 When performing as a Design-Build firm, the Contractor has sole responsibility

for discrepancies, errors, and omissions in the drawings and specifications.

6.1.6.5 When performing as a Construction Manager-at-Risk, the Contractor has a shared responsibility for discovery and resolution of discrepancies, errors, and omissions in the Contract Documents. In such case, the Contractor’s responsibility pertains to review, coordination, and recommendation of resolution


strategies within budget constraints, but does not establish a liability for design.

6.1.6.6 The Contractor has no liability for errors, omissions, or inconsistencies unless the Contractor knowingly failed to report a recognized problem to the Owner or the Work is executed under a Design-Build or Construction Manager-at-Risk contract as outlined above. Should the Contractor fail to perform the examination and reporting obligations of these provisions, the Contractor is responsible for avoidable costs, direct, and/or consequential damages.

6.2 Requirements for Record Documents

Maintain at the Site one copy of all Drawings, Specifications, addenda, approved Submittals, Contract modifications, and all Project correspondence. Keep current and maintain Drawings and Specifications in good order with postings and markings to record actual conditions of Work and show and reference all changes made during construction. Provide Owner and AE access to these documents.

6.2.1 Maintain this record set of Drawings and Specifications which reflect the "As

Constructed" conditions and representations of the Work performed, whether it be directed by addendum, Change Order or otherwise. Make available all records prescribed herein for reference and examination by the Owner and its representatives and agents.

6.2.2 Update the "As-Constructed" Drawings and Specifications monthly prior to submission of

periodic partial pay estimates. Failure to maintain such records constitutes cause for denial of a progress payment otherwise due.

6.2.3 Prior to requesting Substantial Completion Inspection by the ODR and AE, furnish a

complete set of the marked up “As-Constructed” set maintained at the site and one photocopy of same. Concurrently with furnishing these record drawings, furnish a preliminary copy of each operating and maintenance manual (O&M) required by the Contract Documents, for review by the AE and the ODR.

6.2.4 Once determined acceptable, provide mylar prints of professionally drafted “As-

Constructed” drawings, along with electronic copy on CD, “As-Constructed” specifications in bound volume(s) along with electronic copy on CD, two sets of photocopies or prints of the mylar “As-Constructed” drawings, two sets of operating and maintenance manuals, two sets of approved submittals, and other record documents as required elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

Article 7. Construction Safety 7.1. General. It is the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its Subcontractors to be

familiar with, enforce and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91-596, 29 U.S.C. §§651 et. seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA) and all amendments thereto. The Contractor shall prepare a Safety Plan specific to the Project and submit it to the ODR and AE prior to commencing Work. In addition, the Contractor and all of its Subcontractors shall comply with all applicable laws and regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property to protect them from damage, injury or loss and erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection.

7.2. Notices. The Contractor shall provide notices as follows:


7.2.1 Notify owners of adjacent property including those that own or operate utility services and/or underground facilities, and utility owners, when prosecution of the Work may affect them or their facilities, and cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement, and access to their facilities and/or utilities.

7.2.2 Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication

information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the site in connection with laws and regulations. Maintain a complete file of MSDS for all materials in use on site throughout the construction phase and make such file available to the Owner and its agents as requested.

7.3 Emergencies. In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall

act to minimize, mitigate, and prevent threatened damage, injury or loss.

7.3.1 Have authorized agents of Contractor respond immediately upon call at anytime of day or night when circumstances warrant the presence of Contractor to protect the Work or adjacent property from damage or to take such action pertaining to the Work as may be necessary to provide for the safety of the public.

7.3.2 Give the ODR and AE prompt notice of all such events.

7.3.3 If Contractor believes that any changes in the Work or variations from Contract

Documents have been caused by its emergency response, promptly notify the Owner within 72 hours of the emergency response event.

7.3.4 Should Contractor fail to respond, Owner is authorized to direct other forces to take

action as necessary and Owner may deduct any cost of remedial action from funds otherwise due the Contractor.

7.4 Injuries. In the event of an incident or accident involving outside medical care for an individual on

or near the Work, Contractor shall notify the ODR and other parties as may be directed within twenty-four (24) hours of the event.

7.4.1 Record the location of the event and the circumstances surrounding it, by using

photography or other means, and gather witness statements and other documentation which describes the event.

7.4.2 Supply the ODR and AE with an incident report no later than 36 hours after the

occurrence of the event. In the event of a catastrophic incident (one fatality or three workers hospitalized), barricade and leave intact the scene of the incident until all investigations are complete. A full set of incident investigation documents, including facts, finding of cause, and remedial plans shall be provided within one week after occurrence, unless otherwise directed by legal counsel. Contractor shall provide the ODR with written notification within one week of such catastrophic event if legal counsel delays submission of full report.

7.5 Environmental Safety. Upon encountering any previously unknown potentially hazardous

material, or other materials potentially contaminated by hazardous material, Contractor shall immediately stop work activities impacted by the discovery, secure the affected area, and notify the ODR immediately.

7.5.1 Bind all Subcontractors to the same duty.

7.5.2 Upon receiving such notice, the ODR will promptly engage qualified experts to make


such investigations and conduct such tests as may be reasonably necessary to determine the existence or extent of any environmental hazard. Upon completion of this investigation, the ODR will issue a written report to the Contractor identifying the material(s) found and indicate any necessary steps to be taken to treat, handle, transport or dispose of the material.

7.5.3 The Owner may hire third-party contractors to perform any or all such steps.

7.5.4 Should compliance with the ODR’s instructions result in an increase in the Contractor’s

cost of performance, or delay the Work, the Owner will make an equitable adjustment to the Contract price and/or the time of completion, and modify the Contract in writing accordingly.

7.6 Trenching Plan. When the project requires excavation which either exceeds a depth of four feet,

or results in any worker’s upper body being positioned below grade level, the Contractor is required to submit a trenching plan to the ODR prior to commencing trenching operations. The plan is required to be prepared and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Texas, and employed by the Contractor. Said engineer cannot be anyone who is otherwise either directly or indirectly engaged on this project

Article 8. Quality Control 8.1 Materials & Workmanship. The Contractor shall execute Work in a good and workmanlike matter

in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall develop and provide a Quality Control Plan specific to this project and acceptable to the Owner. Where Contract Documents do not specify quality standards, complete and construct all Work in compliance with generally accepted construction industry standards. Unless otherwise specified, incorporate all new materials and equipment into the Work under the Contract.

8.2 Testing

8.2.1 Contractor Testing. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating and paying for all routine and special tests required to confirm compliance with quality and performance requirement of the Contract Documents. This “quality control” testing shall include any particular testing required by the Specifications and the following general tests.

8.2.1.1 Any test of basic material or fabricated equipment included as part of a submittal

for a required item in order to establish compliance with the Contract Documents.

8.2.1.2 Any test of basic material or fabricated equipment offered as a substitute for a specified item on which a test may be required in order to establish compliance with the Contract Documents.

8.2.1.3 Routine, preliminary, start-up, pre-functional and operational testing of building

equipment and systems as necessary to confirm operational compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents.

8.2.1.4 All subsequent tests on original or replaced materials conducted as a result of

prior testing failure.

8.2.2 Owner Testing. The Owner reserves the right to subject materials and systems incorporated into the Project to routine tests as may be specified or as deemed necessary by the ODR or the AE to insure compliance with the quality and/or


performance requirements of the Contract Documents and/or with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and/or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction. The results of such “quality assurance” testing will be provided to the Contractor and, to the extent provided, the Contractor may rely on findings.

8.2.3 All testing shall be performed in accordance with standard test procedures by an

accredited laboratory, or special consultant as appropriate, acceptable to the Owner. Results of all tests shall be provided promptly to the ODR, Architect/Engineer and the Contractor.

8.2.4 Non-Compliance (Test Results). Should any of the tests indicate that a material and/or

system does not comply with the contract requirements, the burden of proof remains with the Contractor, subject to:

8.2.4.1 Contractor selection and submission of the laboratory for Owner acceptance.

8.2.4.2 Acceptance by the Owner of the quality and nature of tests.

8.2.4.3 All tests taken in the presence of the Architect/Engineer and/or ODR, or their

representatives.

8.2.4.4 If tests confirm that the material/systems comply with Contract Documents, the Owner will pay the cost of the test.

8.2.4.5 If tests reveal noncompliance, the Contractor will pay those laboratory fees and

costs of that particular test and all future tests, of that failing Work, necessary to eventually confirm compliance with Contract Documents.

8.2.4.6 Proof of noncompliance with the Contract Documents will make the Contractor

liable for any corrective action which the ODR determines appropriate, including complete removal and replacement of non-compliant work or material.

8.2.5 Notice of Testing. The Contractor shall give the ODR and the AE timely notice of its

readiness and the date arranged so the ODR and AE may observe such inspection, testing or approval.

8.2.6 Test Samples. The Contractor is responsible for providing samples of sufficient size for

test purposes and for coordinating such tests with their Work Progress Schedule to avoid delay.

8.2.7 Covering Up Work - If the Contractor covers up any Work without providing the Owner an

opportunity to inspect, the Contractor shall, if requested by ODR, uncover and recover the work at Contractor’s expense.

8.3 Submittals

8.3.1 Contractor’s Submittals. Submit with reasonable promptness consistent with the Project Schedule and in orderly sequence all Shop Drawings, Samples, or other information required by the Contract Documents, or subsequently required by Change Order. Prior to submitting, the Contractor shall review each submittal for compliance with Contract Documents and certify by approval stamp affixed to each copy. Submittal data presented without the Contractor’s certification will be returned without review or comment, and any delay resulting from such certification is the Contractor's responsibility.


8.3.1.1 Within twenty-one (21) calendar days of the effective date of the Notice To Proceed with construction, submit to the ODR, and the AE, a submittal schedule/register, organized by specification section, listing all items to be furnished for review and approval by the Architect/Engineer and Owner. The list shall include shop drawings, manufacturer's literature, certificates of compliance, materials samples, materials colors, guarantees, and all other items identified throughout the specifications.

8.3.1.2 Indicate the type of item, contract requirements reference, and Contractor’s

scheduled dates for submitting the item along with the requested dates for approval answers from the Architect/Engineer and Owner. The submittal register shall indicate the projected dates for procurement of all included items and shall be updated at least monthly with actual approval and procurement dates. Show and allow a minimum of thirty (30) calendar days duration after receipt by the Architect/Engineer and ODR for review and approval. If re-submittal required, allow a minimum of an additional fifteen (15) calendar days for review. Submit the updated submittal register with each request for progress payment. The Owner may establish routine review procedures and schedules for submittals at the preconstruction conference and/or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

8.3.1.3 Coordinate the submittal register with the Work Progress Schedule. Do not

schedule Work requiring a submittal to begin prior to scheduling review and approval of the related submittal. Revise and/or update both schedules monthly to ensure consistency and current project data. Provide to the ODR the updated submittal register and schedule with each application for progress payment. Refer to requirements for the Work Progress Schedule for inclusion of procurement activities therein. Regardless, the submittal register shall identify dates submitted and returned and shall be used to confirm status and disposition of particular items submitted, including approval or other action taken and other information not conveniently tracked through the Work Progress Schedule.

8.3.1.4 By submitting Shop Drawings, Samples or other required information, the esents

and certifies that they have determined and verified all applicable field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data; and has checked and coordinated each Shop Drawing and Sample with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.

8.3.2 Review of Submittals. AE and ODR review is only for conformance with the design

concept and the information provided in the Contract Documents. Responses to submittals will be in writing. The approval of a separate item does not indicate approval of an assembly in which the item functions. The approval of a submittal does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract unless the Contractor informs the AE and ODR of such deviation in a clear, conspicuous, and written manner on the submittal transmittal and at the time of submission, and obtains the Owner’s written specific approval of the particular deviation.

8.3.3 Correction and Resubmission. Make any corrections required to a submittal and

resubmit the required number of corrected copies promptly so as to avoid delay, until submittal approval. Direct attention in writing to the AE and the ODR, when applicable, to any new revisions other than the corrections requested on previous submissions.

8.3.4 Limits on Shop Drawing Approvals. The Contractor shall not commence any Work

requiring a submittal until approval of the submittal. Construct all such work in accordance with approved submittals. Approval of Shop Drawings and Samples is not


authorization to Contractor to perform extra work or changed work unless authorized through a Change Order. The AE’s and ODR’s approval, if any, does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for defects in the Work resulting from errors or omissions of any kind on the submittal, regardless of any approval action.

8.3.5 No Substitutions Without Approval. The ODR and the AE may receive and consider the

Contractor's request for substitution when the Contractor agrees to reimburse the Owner for review costs and satisfies 8.3.5.1, 8.3.5.2, and 8.3.5.3 in combination with one or more of the items in 8.3.5.4 through 8.3.5.11 of the following conditions, as determined by the Owner. If the Contractor does not satisfy these conditions, the ODR and AE will return the request without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. The Owner will not consider the request if the Contractor cannot provide the product or method because of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.

8.3.5.1 The Contract Documents do not require extensive revisions.

8.3.5.2 Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract

Documents and the design intent of the AE and do not result in an increase in cost to the Owner.

8.3.5.3 The request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted.

8.3.5.4 The Contractor cannot provide the specified product, assembly or method of

construction within the Contract Time.

8.3.5.5 The request directly relates to an "or-equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents.

8.3.5.6 The request directly relates to a "product design standard" or “performance

standard” clause in the Contract Documents. 8.3.5.7 The requested substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage in cost,

time, energy conservation or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities the Owner must assume.

8.3.5.8 The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary

approval by an authority having jurisdiction, and the ODR can approve the requested substitution.

8.3.5.9 The Contractor cannot provide the specified product, assembly or method of

construction in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

8.3.5.10 The Contractor cannot coordinate the specified product, assembly or method of

construction with other materials and where the Contractor certifies they can coordinate the proposed substitution.

8.3.5.11 The specified product, assembly or method of construction cannot provide a

warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty.

8.3.6 Unauthorized Substitutions at Contractor’s Risk. The Contractor is financially responsible

for any additional costs or delays resulting from using materials, equipment or fixtures other than those specified. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for any increased


design or contract administration costs resulting from such unauthorized substitutions. 8.4 Field Mock-up

8.4.1 Mockups shall be constructed prior to commencement of a specified scope of work to confirm acceptable workmanship.

8.4.1.1 As a minimum, field mock-ups shall be constructed for roofing systems, exterior

veneer / finish systems, glazing systems, and any other Work requiring a mock-up as identified throughout the Contract Documents. Mockups for systems not part of the project scope shall not be required.

8.4.1.2 Mock-ups may be incorporated into the Work if allowed by the Contract

Documents and if acceptable to the ODR. If mock-ups are freestanding, they shall remain in place until otherwise directed by the Owner.

8.4.1.3 The Contractor shall include field mock-ups in their Work Progress Schedule and

shall notify the ODR and Architect/Engineer of readiness for review sufficiently in advance to coordinate review without delay.

8.5 Inspection During Construction

8.5.1 The Contractor shall provide sufficient, safe, and proper facilities, including equipment as necessary for safe access, at all reasonable times for observation and/or inspection of the Work by the Owner and its agents.

8.5.2 The Contractor shall not cover up any work with finishing materials or other building

components prior to providing the Owner and its agents an opportunity to perform an inspection of the Work.

8.5.2.1 Should corrections of the Work be required for approval, do not cover up

corrected Work until the Owner indicates approval.

8.5.2.2 Provide notification of at least five (5) working days or otherwise as mutually agreed, to the ODR of the anticipated need for a cover up inspection. Should the ODR fail to make the necessary inspection within the agreed period, the Contractor may proceed with cover up Work, but is not relieved of responsibility for Work to comply with requirements of the Contract Documents.

Article 9. Construction Schedules 9.1. Contract Time. TIME IS AN ESSENTIAL ELEMENT OF THE CONTRACT. The Contract Time is

the time between the dates indicated in the Notice to Proceed for commencement of the Work and for achieving Substantial Completion and Final Completion. The Contract Time can be modified only by Change Order. Failure to achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time, Final Completion within thirty (30) days following Substantial Completion or as otherwise agreed to in writing will cause damage to the Owner and may subject the Contractor to Liquidated Damages as provided in the Contract Documents.

9.2. Notice to Proceed. The Owner will issue a Notice to Proceed which shall state the dates for

beginning Work and for achieving Substantial Completion and Final Completion of the Work. 9.3. Work Progress Schedule. Refer to Special Conditions and Division 1 General Administration


Specifications for additional schedule requirements. Unless indicated otherwise in those documents, Contractor shall submit their initial Work Progress Schedule for the Work in relation to the entire Project not later than twenty-one (21) days after the effective date of the Notice to Proceed to the ODR and the AE. . Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, the Work Progress Schedule shall be computerized Critical Path Method (CPM) with full reporting capability. This initial schedule shall indicate the dates for starting and completing the various aspects required to complete the Work, including mobilization, procurement, installation, testing, inspection, and acceptance of all the Work of the Contract. When acceptable to the Owner, the initially accepted schedule shall be the Baseline Schedule for comparison to actual conditions throughout the contract duration.

9.3.1 Schedule Requirements. Submit electronic and paper copy of the initial Work Progress

Schedule reflecting accurate and reliable representations of the planned progress of the Work, the Work to date if any, and of the Contractor’s actual plans for its completion. Organize and provide adequate detail so the Schedule is capable of measuring and forecasting the effect of delaying events on completed and uncompleted activities.

9.3.1.1 Re-submit initial Schedule as required to address review comments from AE and

ODR until such Schedule is accepted as the Baseline Schedule.

9.3.1.2 Submittal of a schedule, schedule revision or schedule update constitutes the Contractor’s representation to the Owner of the accurate depiction of all progress to date and that the Contractor will follow the schedule as submitted in performing the Work.

9.3.2 Schedule Updates. Update the Work Progress Schedule and the Submittal Schedule

monthly, as a minimum, to reflect progress to date and current plans for completing the Work, and submit paper and electronic copy of the update to the AE and ODR as directed. The Owner has no duty to make progress payments unless accompanied by the updated Work Progress Schedule. Show the anticipated date of completion reflecting all extensions of time granted through Change Order as of the date of the update. The Contractor may revise the Progress Schedule logic only with the Owner’s concurrence when in the Contractor’s judgment it becomes necessary for the management of the Work. Identify all proposed changes to schedule logic to Owner and to the AE via an Executive Summary accompanying the updated schedule for review prior to implementation of revisions.

9.3.3 The Work Progress Schedule is for the Contractor’s use in managing the Work and

submittal of the Schedule, and successive updates or revisions, is for the information of the Owner and to demonstrate that the Contractor has complied with requirements for planning the Work. The Owner’s acceptance of a schedule, schedule update or revision constitutes the Owner’s agreement to coordinate its own activities with the Contractor’s activities as shown on the schedule.

9.3.3.1 Acceptance of the Work Progress Schedule, or update and/or revision thereto

does not indicate any approval of the Contractor’s proposed sequences and duration.

9.3.3.2 Acceptance of a Work Progress Schedule update or revision indicating early or

late completion does not constitute the Owner’s consent, alter the terms of the Contract, or waive either the Contractor’s responsibility for timely completion or the Owner’s right to damages for the Contractor’s failure to do so.

9.3.3.3 The Contractor’s scheduled dates for completion of any activity or the entire


Work do not constitute a change in terms of the contract. Change Orders are the only method of modifying the completion Date(s) and Contract time.

9.4 Ownership of Float. Unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall

develop the schedule and their execution plan to provide a minimum of 10 percent total float at the project level at acceptance of the Baseline Schedule. Float time contained in the Work Progress Schedule is not for the exclusive benefit of the Contractor or the Owner, but belongs to the Project and may be consumed by either party as needed on a first-used basis.

9.5 Completion of Work. The Contractor is accountable for completing the Work in the time stated in

the Contract, or as otherwise amended by Change Order.

9.5.1 If, in the judgment of the Owner, the work is behind schedule and the rate of placement of work is inadequate to regain scheduled progress to insure timely completion of the entire work or a separable portion thereof, the Contractor, when so informed by the Owner, shall immediately take action to increase the rate of work placement by:

9.5.1.1 An increase in working forces. 9.5.1.2 An increase in equipment or tools.

9.5.1.3 An increase in hours of work or number of shifts.

9.5.1.4 Expedite delivery of materials.

9.5.1.5 Other action proposed if acceptable to Owner.

9.5.2 Within ten (10) calendar days after such notice from the ODR, the Contractor shall notify

the ODR in writing of the specific measures taken and/or planned to increase the rate of progress. Include an estimate as to the date of scheduled progress recovery and an updated Work Progress Schedule illustrating the Contractor's plan for achieving timely completion of the project. Should the ODR deem the plan of action inadequate, take additional steps or make adjustments as necessary to its plan of action until it meets with the ODR’s approval.

9.6 Modification of the Contract Time

9.6.1 Delays and extension of time as hereinafter described are valid only if executed in accordance with provisions set forth in Article 11.

9.6.2 When a delay defined herein as excusable prevents the Contractor from completing the

Work within the Contract Time, the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time. The Owner will make an equitable adjustment and extend the number of calendar days lost because of excusable delay, as measured by the Contractor’s progress schedule. All extensions of time will be granted in calendar days. In no event, however, will an extension of time be granted for delays that merely extend the duration of non-critical activities, or which only consume float without delaying the project completion date.

9.6.2.1 “A Weather Day” is a day on which the Contractor’s current schedule indicates

Work is to be done, and on which inclement weather and related site conditions prevent the Contractor from performing seven continuous hours of Work between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Weather days are excusable delays. When weather conditions at the site prevent work from proceeding, immediately notify the ODR for confirmation of the conditions. At the end of each calendar month,


submit to the ODR and AE a list of Weather Days occurring in that month along with documentation of the impact on critical activities. Based on confirmation by the ODR, any time extension granted will be issued by Change Order. If the Contractor and Owner cannot agree on the time extension, the Owner may issue a ULCO for fair and reasonable time extension.

9.6.2.2 Excusable Delay. The Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment of time,

issued via change order, for delays caused by the following:

9.6.2.2.1 Errors, omissions and imperfections in design which the AE corrects by means of changes in the drawings and specifications.

9.6.2.2.2 Unanticipated physical conditions at the Site which the AE corrects by means of

changes to the drawings and specifications or for which the ODR directs changes in the Work identified in the Contract Documents.

9.6.2.2.3 Changes in the Work that effect activities identified in the Contractor’s schedule

as “critical” to completion of the entire Work, if such changes are ordered by the ODR or the AE.

9.6.2.2.4 Suspension of Work for unexpected natural events (sometimes called “acts of

God”), civil unrest, strikes or other events which are not within the reasonable control of the Contractor.

9.6.2.2.5 Suspension of Work for convenience of the ODR, which prevents Contractor

from completing the Work within the Contract Time.

9.6.3 The Contractor’s relief in the event of such delays is the time impact to the critical path as determined by analysis of the Contractor’s schedule. In the event that the Contractor incurs additional direct costs because of the delay, they are to be determined pursuant to the provisions of Article 11.

9.7 No Damages for Delay. The Contractor has no claim for monetary damages for delay or

hindrances to the work from any cause, including without limitation any act or omission of the Owner.

9.8 Concurrent Delay. When the completion of the Work is simultaneously delayed by an excusable

delay and a delay arising from a cause not designated as excusable, the Contractor may not be entitled to a time extension for the period of concurrent delay

9.9 Other Time Extension Requests. Time extensions requested in association with changes to the

Work directed or requested by the Owner shall be included with the Contractor’s proposed costs for such change. Time extensions requested for inclement weather are covered by paragraph 9.6.2.1 above. If the Contractor believes that the completion of the Work is delayed by a circumstance other than for changes directed to the Work or weather, they shall give the ODR written notice, stating the nature of the delay and the activities potentially affected, within five (5) calendar days after the onset of the event or circumstance giving rise to the excusable delay. Provide sufficient written evidence to document the delay. In the case of a continuing cause of delay, only one claim is necessary. State claims for extensions of time in numbers of whole or half calendar days.

9.9.1 Within ten (10) calendar days after the cessation of the delay, the Contractor shall

formalize its request for extension of time in writing to include a full analysis of the schedule impact of the delay and substantiation of the excusable nature of the delay. All


Changes to the Contract Time or made as a result of such claims is by Change Order, as set forth in Article 11.

9.9.2 No extension of time releases the Contractor or the Surety furnishing a performance or

payment bond from any obligations under the contract or such a bond. Those obligations remain in full force until the discharge of the Contract.

9.9.3 Contents of Time Extension Requests. Provide with each Time Extension Request a

quantitative demonstration of the impact of the delay on project completion time, based on the Work Progress Schedule. Include with Time Extension Requests a reasonably detailed narrative setting forth:

9.9.3.1 The nature of the delay and its cause; the basis of the Contractor’s claim of

entitlement to a time extension.

9.9.3.2 Documentation of the actual impacts of the claimed delay on the critical path indicated in the Contractor’s Work Progress Schedule, and any concurrent delays.

9.9.3.3 Description and documentation of steps taken by the Contractor to mitigate the

effect of the claimed delay, including, when appropriate, the modification of the Work Progress Schedule.

9.9.4 Owner’s Response. The Owner will respond to the Time Extension Request by providing

to the Contractor written notice of the number of days granted, if any, and giving its reason if this number differs from the number of days requested by the Contractor.

9.9.4.1 The Owner will not grant time extensions for delays that do not affect the

Contract Completion Date.

9.9.4.2 The Owner will respond to each properly submitted Time Extension Request within fifteen (15) calendar days following receipt. If the Owner cannot reasonably make a determination about the Contractor’s entitlement to a time extension within that time, the Owner will notify the Contractor in writing. Unless otherwise agreed by the Contractor, the Owner has no more than fifteen (15) additional calendar days to prepare a final response. If the Owner fails to respond within forty-five (45) calendar days from the date the Time Extension Request is received, the Contractor is entitled to a time extension in the amount requested.

9.10 Failure to Complete Work Within the Contract Time. TIME I S OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS

CONTRACT. The Contractor’s failure to substantially complete the Work within the Contract Time or to achieve final completion as required will cause damage to the Owner. These damages are liquidated by agreement of the Contractor and the Owner, as set forth in the Contract Documents.

9.11 Liquidated Damages. The Owner may collect Liquidated Damages due from the Contractor

directly or indirectly by reducing the contract sum in the amount of Liquidated Damages stated in the Contract Documents.

Article 10. Payments 10.1 Schedule of Values. The Contractor shall submit to the ODR and the AE for acceptance a


Schedule of Values, or Work Breakdown, accurately itemizing material and labor for the various classifications of the Work based on the organization of the specification sections and using the same activity names and terms as the Work Progress Schedule. The accepted Schedule of Values will be the basis for the progress payments under the Contract.

10.1.1 No progress payments will be made prior to receipt and acceptance of the Schedule of

Values, provided in such detail as required by the ODR, and submitted not less than twenty-one calendar (21) days prior to the first request for payment. The Schedule of Values shall follow the order of trade divisions of the specifications and include costs for general conditions, fees, contingencies, and Owner cash allowances, if applicable, so that the sum of the items will equal the contract price. As appropriate, assign each item labor and/or material values, the subtotal thereof equaling the value of the work in place when complete.

10.1.2 The Contractor shall retain a copy of all worksheets used in preparation of its bid or

proposal, supported by a notarized statement that the worksheets are true and complete copies of the documents used to prepare the bid or proposal. Make the worksheets available to the ODR at the time of Contract execution. Thereafter grant the Owner during normal business hours access to said notarized copy of worksheets at any time during the period commencing upon execution of the Contract and ending one year after final payment.

10.2 Progress Payments. The Contractor will receive periodic progress payments for Work

performed, materials in place, suitably stored on site, or as otherwise agreed to by the Owner and the Contractor. Payment is not due until receipt by the ODR or his designee of a correct and complete Pay Application in electronic and/or hard copy format as set forth in Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions or Division 1 Specifications, and certified by the AE. Progress payments are made provisionally and do not constitute acceptance of work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner will not process progress payment applications for Change Order work until all parties execute the Change Order.

10.2.1 Preliminary Pay Worksheet once each month that a progress payment is to be requested,

the Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer and the ODR a complete, clean copy of a preliminary pay worksheet or Preliminary Pay Application, to include the following:

10.2.1.1 The Contractor’s estimate of the amount of Work performed, labor furnished and

materials incorporated into the Work, using the established Schedule of Values.

10.2.1.2 An updated Work Progress Schedule including the Executive Summary and all required schedule reports.

10.2.1.3 HUB Subcontracting Plan reports.

10.2.1.4 Such additional documentation as Owner may require as set forth in the

Supplementary General Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

10.2.2 Contractor’s Application for Progress Payment. As soon as practicable, but in no event later than seven days after receipt of the Preliminary Pay Worksheet, the AE and ODR will meet with the Contractor to review the Preliminary Pay Worksheet and to observe the condition of the Work. Based on this review, the ODR and the AE may require modifications to the Preliminary Pay Worksheet prior to the submittal of an application for progress payment, and will promptly notify the Contractor of revisions necessary for approval. As soon as practicable, the Contractor shall submit its Invoice on the


appropriate and completed form, reflecting the required modifications to the Schedule of Values required by the AE and/or ODR. Attach all additional documentation required by the ODR and/or AE, as well as an affidavit affirming that all payrolls, bills for labor, materials, equipment, subcontracted work and other indebtedness connected with the Contractor’s invoice are paid or will be paid within the time specified in Tex. Gov’t Code, Chapter 2251. No invoice is complete unless it fully reflects all required modifications, and attaches all required documentation including the Contractor’s affidavit.

10.2.3 Certification by Architect/Engineer. Within five days or earlier following the AE’s receipt of

the Contractor’s formal invoice, the AE will review the application for progress payment for completeness, and forward to the ODR. The AE will certify that the application is complete and payable, or that it is incomplete, stating in particular what is missing. If the Invoice is incomplete, the Contractor shall make the required corrections and resubmit the Invoice for processing.

10.3 Owner’s Duty to Pay. The Owner has no duty to pay the Contractor except on receipt by the

ODR of; 1) a complete Invoice certified by the AE and 2) the Contractor’s updated Work Progress Schedule, and 3) confirmation that the Contractor’s as-built documentation at the site is kept current.

10.3.1 Payment for stored materials and/or equipment confirmed by the Owner and AE to be on-

site or otherwise properly stored is limited to 85 percent of the invoice price or 85 percent of the scheduled value for the materials or equipment, whichever is less.

10.3.2 Retainage. The Owner will withhold from each progress payment, as retainage, 5 percent

of the total earned amount, the amount authorized by law, or as otherwise set forth in the Supplementary General Conditions. Retainage is managed in conformance with Tex. Gov’t Code, Chapter 2252, Government Code, subchapter B.

10.3.2.1 The Contractor shall provide written consent of its Surety for any request for

reduction or release of retainage.

10.3.2.2 At least sixty-five (65) percent of the total Contract must be completed before the Owner can consider a retainage reduction or release.

10.3.3 Price Reduction to Cover Loss. The Owner may reduce any Periodic Invoice, or

application for Progress Payment, prior to payment to the extent necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of actions of the Contractor including, but not limited to:

10.3.3.1 Defective or incomplete Work not remedied.

10.3.3.2 Damage to Work of a separate Contractor.

10.3.3.3 Failure to maintain scheduled progress or reasonable evidence that the Work will

not be completed within the Contract Time.

10.3.3.4 Persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

10.3.3.5 Reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid portion

of the contract sum.

10.3.3.6 Assessment of fines for violations of Prevailing Wage Rate law; or


10.3.3.7 Failure to include the appropriate amount of retainage for that periodic progress payment.

10.3.4 Title to all material and Work covered by progress payments transfers to the Owner upon

payment.

10.3.4.1 Transfer of title to Owner does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the care and protection of materials and Work upon which payments have been made until final acceptance of the entire Work, or the restoration of any damaged Work, or waive the right of the Owner to require the fulfillment of all the terms of the Contract.

10.4 Progress payments to the Contractor do not release the Contractor or its surety from any

obligations under this Contract.

10.4.1 Upon the Owner’s request, the Contractor shall furnish manifest proof of the status of Subcontractor’s accounts in a form acceptable to the Owner.

10.4.2 Pay estimate certificates must be signed by a corporate officer or a representative duly

authorized by the Contractor.

10.4.3 Provide copies of bills of lading, invoices, delivery receipts or other evidence of the location and value of such materials in requesting payment for materials.

10.4.4 For purposes of Tex. Gov’t Code § 2251.021 (a) (2), the date the performance of service

is complete is the date when the Owner’s representative approves the application for payment.

10.5 Off-Site Storage. With prior approval by the Owner and in the event Contractor elects to store

materials at an off-site location, abide by the following conditions, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Owner.

10.5.1.1 Store materials in a Bonded Commercial Warehouse.

10.5.1.2 Provide separate Insurance Coverage adequate not only to cover materials while

in storage, but also in transit from the off-site storage areas to the project site. Copies of duly authenticated Certificates of Insurance, made out to insure the State Agency which is signatory to the contract, must be filed with the Owner’s representative.

10.5.1.3 Inspection by Owner’s representative is allowed at any time. The Owner’s

Inspectors must be satisfied with the security, control, maintenance, and preservation measures.

10.5.1.4 Materials for this project are physically separated and marked for the project in a

sectioned-off area. Only materials which have been approved through the submittal process are to be considered for payment.

10.5.1.5 Owner reserves the right to reject materials at any time prior to final acceptance

of the complete Contract if they do not meet Contract requirements regardless of any previous progress payment made.

10.5.1.6 With each monthly payment estimate, submit a report to the ODR, AE, and Inspector listing the quantities of materials already paid for and still stored in the off-site location.


10.5.1.7 Make warehouse records, receipts and invoices available to Owner’s

representatives, upon request, to verify the quantities and their disposition.

10.5.1.8 In the event of Contract termination or default by Contractor, the items in storage off-site, upon which payment has been made, will be promptly turned over to Owner or Owner’s agents at a location near the jobsite as directed by the ODR. The full provisions of PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS on this project cover the materials off-site in every respect as though they were stored on the Project Site.

Article 11. Changes 11.1 Change Orders. A Change Order issued after execution of the Contract is a written order to the

Contractor, signed by the ODR, the Contractor, and the Architect/Engineer, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time can only be changed by Change Order. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates his agreement therewith, including the adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time. The ODR may issue written authorization for the Contractor to proceed with work of a change order in advance of final execution by all parties.

11.1.1 The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the

general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, and the Contract Sum and the Contract Time will be adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. If such changes cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Contract, an equitable adjustment shall be made and confirmed in writing in a Change Order.

11.1.2 It is recognized by the parties hereto and agreed by them that the specifications and

drawings may not be complete or free from errors, omissions and imperfections or that they may require changes or additions in order for the work to be completed to the satisfaction of Owner and that, accordingly, it is the express intention of the parties, notwithstanding any other provisions in this Contract, that any errors, omissions or imperfections in such specifications and drawings, or any changes in or additions to same or to the work ordered by Owner and any resulting delays in the work or increases in Contractor’s costs and expenses, shall not constitute or give rise to any claim, demand or cause of action of any nature whatsoever in favor of Contractor, whether for breach of contract, quantum meruit, or otherwise; provided, however, that Owner shall be liable to Contractor for the sum stated to be due Contractor in any Change Order approved and signed by both parties, it being agreed hereby that such sum, together with any extension of time contained in said Change Order, shall constitute full compensation to Contractor for all costs, expenses and damages to Contractor, whether direct, consequential or otherwise in any wise incident to, arising out of, or resulting directly or indirectly from the work performed by Contractor under such Change Order.

11.1.3 Procedures for administration of Change Orders shall be established by the Owner and

stated in Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions, or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

11.1.4 Except as provided above, no order, oral statement, or direction of the Owner or his duly

appointed representative shall be treated as a change under this article or entitle the Contractor to an adjustment.


11.1.5 The Contractor agrees that the Owner or any of its duly authorized representatives shall

have access and the right to examine any directly pertinent books, documents, papers, and records of the Contractor. Further, the Contractor agrees to include in all its subcontracts a provision to the effect that the subcontractor agrees that the Owner or any of its duly authorized representatives shall have access to and the right to examine any directly pertinent books, documents, papers and records of such contractor relating to any claim arising from this Contract, whether or not the subcontractor is a party to the claim. The period of access and examination described herein which relates to appeals under the Disputes article of the Contract, litigation, or the settlement of claims arising out of the performance of this Contract shall continue until final disposition of such claims, appeals or litigation.

11.2 Unit Prices: If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,

and of the quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order that application of the agreed unit prices to the quantities of work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or the Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted as provided in the Special Conditions or as agreed to by the parties and incorporated into Change Order.

11.3 Claims for Additional Costs

11.3.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the Contract Sum not related to a requested change, they shall give the Owner and the Architect/Engineer written notice thereof within twenty-one (21) days after the occurrence of the event giving rise to such claim, but, in any case before proceeding to execute the work considered to be additional cost or time, except in an emergency endangering life or property in which case the Contractor shall act in accordance with Article 7.2.1. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. If the Owner and the Contractor cannot agree on the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, it shall be determined as set forth under Article 15. Any change in the Contract Sum resulting from such claim shall be authorized by Change Order.

11.3.2 If the Contractor claims that additional cost is involved because of, but not limited to, 1)

any written interpretation of the Contract Documents, 2) any order by the Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Article 14 where the Contractor was not at fault, 3) any written order for a minor change in the Work issued pursuant to Article 11.4, the Contractor shall make such claim as provided in Article 11.3.1.

11.3.3 Should the Contractor or his Subcontractors fail to call attention of the AE to obvious

discrepancies or omissions in the Bid/Proposal Documents during the pre-bid/pre-proposal period, but claim additional costs for corrective work after contract award, the Owner may assume intent to circumvent competitive bidding for necessary corrective work. In such case, the Owner may choose to let a separate contract for the corrective work, or issue a Unilateral Change Order to require performance by the Contractor. Claims for time extensions or for extra cost resulting from delayed notice of contract document discrepancies or omissions will not be considered by the Owner.

11.4 Minor Changes. The AE, with concurrence of the ODR, will have authority to order minor

changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time. Such changes shall be effected by written order which the Contractor shall carry out promptly and record on as-built record documents.

11.5 Concealed Site Conditions. If, in the performance of the Contract, subsurface, latent or


concealed conditions at the site are found to be materially different from the information included in the bid/proposal documents, or if unknown conditions of an unusual nature are disclosed differing materially from the conditions usually inherent in work of the character shown and specified, the ODR and the Architect/Engineer shall be notified in writing of such conditions before they are disturbed. Upon such notice, or upon its own observation of such conditions, the Architect/Engineer, with the approval of the ODR, will promptly make such changes in the Drawings and Specifications as they deem necessary to conform to the different conditions, and any increase or decrease in the cost of the Work, or in the time within which the Work is to be completed, resulting from such changes will be adjusted by Change Order, subject to the prior approval of the ODR.

11.6 Extension of Time. All Changes to the Contract Time shall be made as a consequence of

requests as required under Article 9, and as documented by Change Order as provided under Article 11.1.

11.7 Administration of Change Order Requests All changes in the Contract shall be administered in

accordance with procedures approved by the Owner, and when required make use of such electronic information management system(s) as the owner may employ.

11.7.1 Routine changes in the Construction Contract shall be formally initiated by the

Architect/Engineer by means of a Change Request form detailing requirements of the proposed change for pricing by the Contractor. This action may be preceded by communications between the Contractor, AE and ODR concerning the need and nature of the change, but such communications shall not constitute a basis for beginning the proposed Work by the Contractor. Except for emergency conditions described below, approval of the Contractor’s cost proposal by the Architect/Engineer and ODR will be required for authorization to proceed with the Work being changed. The Owner will not be responsible for the cost of work changed without prior approval and the Contractor may be required to remove work so installed.

11.7.2 All proposed costs for change order work must be supported by itemized accounting of

material, equipment and associated itemized installation costs in sufficient detail, following the outline and organization of the established Schedule of Values, to permit analysis by the AE and ODR using current estimating guides and/or practices. Photocopies of Subcontractor and vendor proposals shall be furnished unless specifically waived by the ODR. Contractor shall provide written response to change request within twenty-one (21) calendar days of receipt.

11.7.3 Any unexpected circumstance which necessitates an immediate change in order to avoid

a delay in progress of the Work may be expedited by verbal communication and authorization between the Contractor and Owner, with written confirmation following within twenty-four (24) hours. A limited scope not-to-exceed estimate of cost and time will be requested prior to authorizing Work to proceed. Should the estimate be impractical for any reason, the ODR may authorize the use of detailed cost records of such work to establish and confirm the actual costs and time for documentation in a formal Change Order.

11.7.4 Emergency changes to save life or property may be initiated by the Contractor alone (see

Article 7.3) with the claimed cost and/or time of such work to be fully documented as to necessity and detail of the reported costs and/or time.

11.8 Pricing Change Order Work The amounts that the Contractor and/or its Subcontractors add to a

Change Order for profit and overhead will also be considered by the Owner before approval is given. The amounts established hereinafter are the maximums that are acceptable to the


Owner.

11.8.1 For work performed by its forces, the Contractor will be allowed their actual costs for materials, the total amount of wages paid for labor, the total cost of Federal Old Age Benefit (Social Security Tax) and of Worker’s Compensation and Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, plus Bond cost if the change results in an increase in the Bond premium paid by the Contractor. To the total of the above costs, the Contractor will be allowed to add a percentage as noted below to cover overhead and profit combined. Overhead shall be considered to include insurance other than mentioned above, field and office supervisors and assistants, including safety and scheduling personnel, use of small tools, incidental job burdens and general Home Office expenses, and no separate allowance will be made therefore. Allowable percentages for overhead and profit on changes will not exceed 15 percent if the total of self-performed work is less than or equal to $10,000, 10 percent if the total of self-performed work is between $10,000 and $20,000 and 7.5 percent if the total of self performed work is over $20,000, for any specific change priced.

11.8.2 For subcontracted Work each affected Subcontractor shall figure its costs, overhead and

profit as described above for Contractor’s work, all subcontractor costs shall be combined, and to that total subcontractor cost the Contractor will be allowed to add a maximum mark-up of 10 percent if the total of all subcontracted work is less than or equal to $10,000, 7.5 percent if the total of all subcontracted work is between $10,000 and $20,000 and 5 percent if the total of all subcontractor work is over $20,000.

11.8.3 On changes involving both additions and deletions, percentages for overhead and profit

will be allowed only on the net addition. The Owner does not accept and will not pay for additional contract cost identified as indirect, consequential, or as damages caused by delay.

Article 12. Project Completion and Acceptance 12.1 Closing Inspections

12.1.1 Substantial Completion Inspection. When the Contractor considers the entire Work or part thereof Substantially Complete, it shall notify the ODR in writing that the Work will be ready for Substantial Completion Inspection on a specific date. The Contractor shall include with this notice the Contractor’s Punch list to indicate that it has previously inspected all the Work associated with the request for inspection, has corrected items where possible, and includes all items scheduled for completion or correction prior to final inspection. The failure to include any items on this list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. If any of the items on this list prevents the building from the use to which it is intended, the Contractor shall not request a Substantial Completion Inspection. The Owner and its representatives will review the list of items and schedule the requested inspection, or inform the Contractor in writing that such an inspection is premature because the Work is not sufficiently advanced or conditions are not as represented on the Contractor's list.


12.1.1.1 Prior to the Substantial Completion Inspection, the Contractor shall furnish a copy of its marked-up As-Built Drawings and a preliminary copy of each instructional manual, maintenance and operating manual, parts catalog, wiring diagrams, spare parts, specified written warranties and like publications or parts for all installed equipment, systems and like items. Delivery of these items is a prerequisite for requesting the Substantial Completion Inspection.

12.1.1.2 On the date requested by Contractor, or as mutually agreed upon pending the

status of the open items list, the AE, ODR, the Contractor and other Owner representatives as determined by the Owner, will jointly attend the Substantial Completion Inspection, which shall be conducted by the ODR or their delegate. If the ODR determines that the Work is Substantially Complete, the ODR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to be signed by the AE, Owner and Contractor, establishing the date of Substantial Completion. AE will provide with this certificate a list of Punchlist items (the Pre-Final Punch list) for completion prior to final inspection. This list may include items in addition to those on the Contractor's Punchlist, which the inspection team deems necessary to correct or complete prior to Final Inspection. If the Owner occupies the facility upon determination of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall complete all corrective Work at the convenience of the Owner, without disruption to Owner’s use of the facility for its intended purposes.

12.1.2 Final Inspection. The Contractor shall complete the list of items identified on the Pre-Final

Punch list prior to requesting a Final Inspection. Unless otherwise specified, or otherwise agreed in writing by the parties as documented on the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall complete and/or correct all Work within thirty (30) days of the Substantial Completion date. Upon completion of the Pre-Final Punchlist work, the Contractor shall give written notice to the ODR and AE that the Work will be ready for Final Inspection on a specific date. The Contractor shall accompany this notice with a copy of the updated Pre-Final Punch list indicating resolution of all items. On the date specified or as soon thereafter as is practicable, the ODR, AE and the Contractor will inspect the Work. The AE will submit to the Contractor a Final Punchlist of open items that the inspection team requires corrected or completed before final acceptance of the Work.

12.1.2.1 Correct or complete all items on the Final Punchlist before requesting Final

Payment. Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the parties, complete this work within seven (7) days of receiving the Final Punchlist. Upon completion of the Final Punchlist, notify the AE and ODR in writing stating the disposition of each Final Punchlist item. The AE, Owner and Contractor shall promptly inspect the completed items. When the Final Punchlist is complete, and the Contract is fully satisfied according to the Contract Documents the ODR will issue a certificate establishing the date of Final Completion. Completion of all Work is a condition precedent to the Contractor's right to receive Final Payment.

12.1.3 Annotation. Any Certificate issued under this Article may be annotated to indicate that it

is not applicable to specified portions of the Work, or that it is subject to any limitation as determined by the Owner.

12.1.4 Purpose of Inspection. Inspection is for determining the completion of the Work, and

does not relieve the Contractor of its overall responsibility for completing the Work in a good and competent fashion, in compliance with the Contract. Work accepted with incomplete punchlist items or failure of the Owner or other parties to identify Work that does not comply with the Contract Documents or is defective in operation or


workmanship does not constitute a waiver of the Owner's rights under the Contract or relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for performance or warranties.

12.1.5 Additional Inspections

12.1.5.1 If the Owner’s inspection team determines that the Work is not Substantially

Complete at the Substantial Completion Inspection, the ODR or AE will give the Contractor written notice listing cause(s) of the rejection. The ODR will set a time for completion of incomplete or defective work. Complete or correct all work so designated prior to requesting a second Substantial Completion Inspection.

12.1.5.2 If the Owner’s inspection team determines that the Work is not complete at the

Final Inspection, the ODR or the AE will give the Contractor written notice listing the cause(s) of the rejection. The ODR will set a time for completion of incomplete or defective work. The Contractor shall complete or correct all Work so designated prior to again requesting a Final Inspection.

12.1.5.3 The Contract Agreement contemplates three (3) comprehensive inspections: the

Substantial Completion Inspection, the Final Completion Inspection, and the Inspection of Completed Final Punchlist Items. The cost to the Owner of additional inspections resulting from the Work not being ready for one or more of these inspections is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Owner may issue a Unilateral Change Order deducting these costs from Final Payment. Upon the Contractor's written request, the Owner will furnish documentation of any costs so deducted. Work added to the Contract by Change Order after Substantial Completion Inspection is not corrective work for purposes of determining timely completion, or assessing the cost of additional inspections.

12.1.6 Phased Completion. The contract may provide, or project conditions may warrant, as

determined by the ODR, that designated elements or parts of the Work be completed in phases. Where phased completion is required or specifically agreed to by the parties, the provisions of the contract related to Closing Inspections, Occupancy and Acceptance apply independently to each designated element or part of the Work. For all other purposes, unless otherwise agreed by the parties in writing, Substantial Completion of the Work as a whole is the date on which the last element or part of the Work completed receives a Substantially Completion certificate. Final Completion of the Work as a whole is the date on which the last element or part of the Work completed receives a Final Completion certificate.

12.2 Owner’s Right of Occupancy. The Owner may occupy or use all or any portion of the Work

following Substantial Completion, or at any earlier stage of completion. Should the Owner wish to use or occupy the Work, or part thereof, prior to Substantial Completion, the ODR will notify the Contractor in writing. Work performed on the premises by third parties on the Owner's behalf does not constitute occupation or use of the Work by the Owner for purposes of this Article. All Work performed by the Contractor after occupancy, whether in part or in whole, shall be at the convenience of the Owner so as to not disrupt Owner’s use of, or access to occupied areas of the project.

12.3 Acceptance & Payment

12.3.1 Request for Final Payment. Following the certified completion of all work, including all punch list items, cleanup, and the delivery of record documents, the Contractor shall submit a certified Application for Final Payment. Include all sums held as retainage and forward to the AE and the ODR for review and approval.


12.3.2 Final Payment Documentation. Submit, prior to or with the Application for Final Payment, final copies of all close out documents, maintenance and operating instructions, guarantees and warranties, certificates, record documents and all other items required by the Contract. Submit Consent of Surety to Final Payment and an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, subcontracted work and other indebtedness connected with the Work, except as specifically noted, are paid, will be paid, or otherwise satisfied within the period of time required by Tex. Gov’t Code, Chapter 2251. Furnish documentation establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of claims and liens arising out of the Contract. The Contractor may not subsequently submit a claim on behalf of a subcontractor or vendor unless the Contractor’s affidavit notes that claim as an exception.

12.3.3 Architect/Engineer Approval. The AE will review a submitted Application for Final

Payment promptly but in no event later than ten (10) days after its receipt. Prior to the expiration of this deadline, the AE will either 1) return the Application for Final Payment to Contractor with corrections for action and resubmission or 2) accept it, note their approval and send to Owner.

12.3.4 Offsets and Deductions. The Owner may deduct from the Final Payment all sums due

from the Contractor. If the Certificate of Final Completion notes any Work remaining, incomplete, or defects not remedied, the Owner may deduct the cost of remedying such deficiencies from the Final Payment. On such deductions, the Owner will identify each deduction, the amount, and the explanation of the deduction on or by the 21st day after Owner's receipt of an approved Application for Final Payment. Such offsets and deductions shall be incorporated via a final Change Order, including Unilateral Change Order as may be applicable.

12.3.5 Final Payment Due. Final Payment is due and payable by the Owner, subject to all

allowable offsets and deductions, on the 31st day following the Owner’s approval of the Application for Payment. If the Contractor disputes any amount deducted by the Owner, the Contractor shall give notice of the dispute on or before the thirtieth (30th) day following receipt of Final Payment. Failure to do so will bar any subsequent claim for payment of amounts deducted.

12.3.6 Effect of Final Payment. Final Payment constitutes a waiver of all claims by the Owner,

relating to the condition of the Work except those arising from:

12.3.6.1 Faulty or defective Work appearing after Substantial Completion (latent defects); and/or

12.3.6.2 Failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;

and/or

12.3.6.3 Terms of any warranties required by the Contract, or implied by law; and/or

12.3.6.4 Claims arising from personal injury or property damage to third parties.

12.3.7 Waiver of Claims. Final payment constitutes a waiver of all claims and liens by the Contractor except those specifically identified in writing and submitted to the ODR prior to the application for Final Payment.

12.3.8 Effect on Warranty. Regardless of approval and issuance of Final Payment, the Contract

is not deemed fully performed by the Contractor and closed until the expiration of all warranty periods.


Article 13. Warranty & Guarantee 13.1 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee. Contractor warrants to the Owner that all Work

is executed in accordance with the Contract, complete in all parts and in accordance with approved practices and customs, and of the best finish and workmanship. The Contractor further warrants that unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment incorporated in the Work under the Contract are new. The Owner may, at its option, agree in writing to waive any failure of the Work to conform to the Contract, and to accept a reduction in the Contract Price for the cost of repair or diminution in value of the Work by reason of such defect. Absent such a written agreement, the Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute and is not waived by any inspection or observation by the Owner, Architect/Engineer or others, by making any progress payment or final payment, by the use or occupancy of the Work or any portion thereof by the Owner, at any time, or by any repair or correction of such defect made by the Owner.

13.2 Warranty Period. Except as may be otherwise specified or agreed, the Contractor shall repair

all defects in materials, equipment, or workmanship appearing within one year from the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. If Substantial Completion occurs by phase, then the warranty period for that particular Work begins on the date of such occurrence, or as otherwise stipulated on the Certificate of Substantial Completion for the particular Work.

13.3 Limits on Warranty. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or

damage caused by:

13.3.1 Modification or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is not responsible, unless Owner is compelled to undertake maintenance or operation due to the neglect of the Contractor.

13.3.2 Normal wear and tear under normal usage after acceptance of the Work by the Owner.

13.4 Events Not Affecting Warranty. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in a

good and workmanlike manner in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents:

13.4.1.1 Observations by Owner and/or AE.

13.4.1.2 Recommendation to pay any progress or final payment by AE.

13.4.1.3 The issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by Owner

to Contractor under the Contract Documents.

13.4.1.4 Use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner.

13.4.1.5 Any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so.

13.4.1.6 Any review of a Shop Drawing or sample submittal; or

13.4.1.7 Any inspection, test or approval by others.


13.5 Separate Warranties. If a particular piece of equipment or component of the Work for which the contract requires a separate warranty is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion, the Warranty Period for that equipment or component will not begin until Substantial Completion, regardless of any warranty agreements in place between suppliers and/or Subcontractors and the Contractor. The ODR will certify the date of service commencement in the Substantial Completion Certificate.

13.5.1 In addition to the Contractor's warranty and duty to repair, the Contractor expressly

assumes all warranty obligations required under the Contract for specific building components, systems and equipment.

13.5.2 The Contractor may satisfy any such obligation by obtaining and assigning to the Owner

a complying warranty from a manufacturer, supplier, or Subcontractor. Where an assigned warranty is tendered and accepted by the Owner which does not fully comply with the requirements of the Contract, the Contractor remains liable to the Owner on all elements of the required warranty not provided by the assigned warranty.

13.6 Correction of Defects. Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner, or any agent of the Owner

designated as responsible for management of the Warranty Period, of the discovery of a defect, the Contractor shall promptly remedy the defect(s), and provide written notice to the Owner and designated agent indicating action taken. In case of emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage to the Owner, or if the Contractor fails to remedy within 30 days, or within another period agreed to in writing, the Owner may correct the defect and be reimbursed the cost of remedying the defect from the Contractor or its Surety.

13.7 Certification of No Asbestos Containing Materials or Work. The Contractor shall ensure

compliance with the Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA– 40 CFR 763-99 (7)) from all subcontractors and materials suppliers, and shall provide a notarized certification to the Owner that all equipment and materials used in fulfillment of their contract responsibilities are non Asbestos Containing building Materials (ACBM). This certification must be provided no later than the Contractor’s application for Final Payment.

Article 14. Suspension and Termination 14.1. Suspension of Work for Cause. The Owner may, at any time without prior notice, suspend all or

any part of the Work, if after reasonable observation and/or investigation, the Owner determines it is necessary to do so to prevent or correct any condition of the Work, which constitutes an immediate safety hazard, or which may reasonably be expected to impair the integrity, usefulness or longevity of the Work when completed.

14.1.1.1 The Owner will give the Contractor a written notice of suspension for cause,

setting forth the reason for the suspension and identifying the Work suspended. Upon receipt of such notice, the Contractor shall immediately stop the Work so identified. As soon as practicable following the issuance of such a notice, the Owner will initiate and complete a further investigation of the circumstances giving rise to the suspension, and issue a written determination of the findings.

14.1.1.2 If it is confirmed that the cause was within the control of the Contractor, the

Contractor will not be entitled to an extension of time or any compensation for delay resulting from the suspension. If the cause is determined not to have been within the control of the Contractor, and the suspension has prevented the Contractor from completing the Work within the Contract Time, the suspension is an Excusable Delay and a Time Extension will be granted through a Change


Order.

14.1.1.3 Suspension of work under this provision will be no longer than is reasonably necessary to remedy the conditions giving rise to the suspension.

14.2 Suspension of Work for Owner’s Convenience. Upon seven (7) calendar days written notice to

the Contractor, the Owner may at any time without breach of the Contract suspend all or any portion of the Work for a period of up to thirty days for its own convenience. The Owner will give the Contractor a written notice of suspension for convenience, which sets forth the number of suspension days for which the Work, or any portion of it, and the date on which the suspension of Work will cease. When such a suspension prevents the Contractor from completing the Work within the Contract Time, it is an Excusable Delay. A notice of suspension for convenience may be modified by the Owner at any time on seven (7) calendar days written notice to the Contractor. If the Owner suspends the Work for its convenience for more than 60 consecutive calendar days, the Contractor may elect to terminate the contract pursuant to the provisions of the contract.

14.3 Termination by Owner for Cause

14.3.1 The Owner may, without prejudice to any right or remedy, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor, under any of the following circumstances:

14.3.1.1 Persistent or repeated failure or refusal, except during complete or partial

suspensions of work authorized under the Contract, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials; and/or

14.3.1.2 Persistent disregard of laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any

public authority having jurisdiction, including the ODR; and/or

14.3.1.3 Persistent failure to prosecute the work in accordance with the Contract, and to insure its completion within the time, or any approved extension thereof, specified in this Contract; and/or

14.3.1.4 Failure to remedy defective work condemned by the ODR; and/or

14.3.1.5 Failure to pay subcontractors, laborers, and material suppliers pursuant to Tex.

Gov’t Code Chapter 2251; and/or

14.3.1.6 Persistent endangerment to the safety of labor or of the Work; and/or

14.3.1.7 Failure to supply or maintain statutory bonds or to maintain required insurance, pursuant to the contract; and/or

14.3.1.8 Any material breach of the Contract; and/or

14.3.1.9 The Contractor’s insolvency, bankruptcy, or demonstrated financial inability to

perform the work. 14.4 Failure by the Owner to exercise the right to terminate in any instance is not a waiver of the

right to do so in any other instance.

14.4.1 Should the Owner decide to terminate the employment of the Contractor under the


provisions of Article 14.1.1, it will provide to the Contractor and its Surety thirty (30) days prior written notice.

14.4.2 Should the Contractor or its Surety, after having received notice of termination,

demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Owner, remedy to the condition(s) upon which the notice of termination was based, the notice of termination shall be rescinded in writing by the Owner. If so rescinded, the Work may continue without an extension of time.

14.4.3 If the Contractor or its Surety fails to demonstrate remedy to the satisfaction of the Owner

within thirty days following receipt of notice, the Owner may arrange for completion of the Work and deduct the cost of completion from the unpaid Contract Sum.

14.4.3.1 This amount includes the cost of additional Owner costs such as AE services,

other consultants, and contract administration.

14.4.3.2 The Owner will make no further payment to the Contractor or its Surety until all costs of completing the Work are paid. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the costs of administering and finishing the Work, the Contractor will receive the excess funds. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor or its Surety will pay the difference to the Owner.

14.4.3.3 This obligation for payment survives the termination of the Contract.

14.4.3.4 The owner reserves the right in termination for cause to take assignment of all

contracts between the Contractor and its Subcontractors, vendors and suppliers. The ODR will promptly notify the Contractor of the contracts the Owner elects to assume. Upon receipt of such notice, the Contractor shall promptly take all steps necessary to effect such assignment.

14.5 Termination for Convenience of Owner. The Owner reserves the right, without breach, to

terminate the Contract prior to, or during the performance of the Work, for any reason. Upon such an occurrence, the following shall apply:

14.5.1 The Owner will immediately notify the Contractor and the AE in writing, specifying the

reason for and the effective date of contract termination. Such notice may also contain instructions necessary for the protection, storage or decommissioning of incomplete work or systems, and for safety.

14.5.2 Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall immediately proceed with

the following obligations, regardless of any delay in determining or adjusting any amounts due at that point in the Contract:

14.5.4.1 Stop all work.

14.5.4.2 Place no further subcontracts or orders for materials or services.

14.5.4.3 Terminate all subcontracts.

14.5.4.4 Cancel all materials and equipment orders as applicable.

14.5.4.5 Take action that is necessary to protect and preserve all property related to this

Contract which is in the possession of the Contractor.


14.5.3 When the Contract is terminated for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor may recover from the Owner payment for all Work executed, including any additional work required pursuant to the notice of termination, and for any provable loss and reasonable expenses attributable to the Work resulting from such termination.14.6 Termination By Contractor. If the Work is stopped for a period of ninety (90) days under an order of any court or other public authority having jurisdiction, or as a result of an act of government, such as a declaration of a national emergency making materials unavailable, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor, then the Contractor may, upon thirty (30) additional days’ written notice to the ODR, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for all Work executed and for any provable loss and reasonable expenses attributable to the Work resulting from such termination. If the cause of the work stoppage is removed prior to the end of the thirty (30) day notice period, the Contractor may not terminate the Contract.

14.7 Settlement on Termination. When the Contract is terminated for any reason, at any

time prior to 180 days after the effective date of termination, the Contractor shall submit a final termination settlement proposal to the Owner based upon recoverable costs as provided under the contract. If the Contractor fails to submit the proposal within the time allowed, the Owner may determine the amount due to the Contractor because of the termination and pay the determined amount to the Contractor.

Article 15. Dispute Resolution

15.1 Unresolved Contractor Disputes. The dispute resolution process provided for in Tex. Gov’t Code, Chapter 2260, shall be used by the Owner and the Contractor to attempt to resolve any claim for breach of contract made by the Contractor, that is not resolved under procedures described throughout the Uniform General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, or Special Conditions of the Contract.

15.2 Alternative Dispute Resolution Process. The Owner may establish a dispute resolution

process to be utilized in advance of that outlined in Tex. Gov’t Code, Chapter 2260. Article 16. Miscellaneous

16.1. Supplemental and Special Conditions. When the Work contemplated by the Owner is of such a character that the foregoing Uniform General Conditions of the Contract cannot adequately cover necessary and additional contractual relationships, the Contract may include Supplemental and Special Conditions as described below:

16.1.1 Supplemental Conditions may describe the standard procedures and requirements of

contract administration followed by a contracting agency of the State. Supplemental Conditions may expand upon matters covered by the Uniform General Conditions, where necessary, provided the expansion does not weaken the character or intent of the Uniform General Conditions. Supplemental Conditions are of such a character that it is to be anticipated that a contracting agency of the State will normally use the same, or similar, conditions to supplement each of its several projects.

16.1.2 Special Conditions shall relate to a particular project and be peculiar to that project but

shall not weaken the character or intent of the Uniform General Conditions.

16.2 Federally Funded Projects. On Federally funded projects, the Owner may waive, suspend or modify any Article in these Uniform General Conditions which conflicts with


any Federal statue, rule, regulation or procedure, where such waiver, suspension or modification is essential to receipt by the Owner of such Federal funds for the project. In the case of any project wholly financed by Federal funds, any standards required by the enabling Federal statute, or any Federal rules, regulations or procedures adopted pursuant thereto, shall be controlling.

16.3 Internet-based Project Management Systems. At its option, the Owner may administer

its design and construction management through an Internet based management system. In such cases, the Contractor shall conduct communication through this media and perform all project related functions utilizing this database system. This includes correspondence, submittals, requests for information, vouchers or payment requests and processing, amendment, change orders and other administrative activities.

16.3.1 Accessibility and Administration.

16.3.1.1.1 When used, the Owner will make the software accessible via the Internet

to all project team members.

16.3.1.1.2 The Owner shall administer the software. 16.3.2 Training. When used, the Owner shall provide training to the project team members.

END OF UNIFORM GENERAL CONDITIONS

June 16, 2011 Supplementary General Conditions - 1 Library Water Infiltration Mitigation

TEXAS WOMAN’S UNIVERSITY SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 These Supplementary General Conditions amend and supplement the Uniform General Conditions

and shall govern in the event of any conflict with said General Conditions. 1.2 The Uniform General Conditions, these Supplementary General Conditions and Special Conditions,

together with the Drawings, Project Manual and the Owner-Contractor Agreement are complementary to the Contract, each with the other, as if therein specifically reiterated.

2.0 REF: ARTICLE 1.8 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2.1 The Drawings and Specifications referred to in paragraph 1.9 and throughout the General

Conditions are further defined as those entitled Library Water Infiltration Mitigation, Texas Woman's University, Denton, Texas, and include all the following:

a. Drawings: Index of Drawings listed in Set dated June 16, 2011. b. Project Manual:

Proposal and Contract Requirements, General Requirements, Special Requirements and Technical Specifications listed in Table of Contents dated June 16, 2011.

3.0 REF: ARTICLE 2.3 “Venue in Suits” 3.1 The venue for any suit shall be in the jurisdiction of Denton County in lieu of Travis County. 4.0 REF: ARTICLE 3.1.2 “Owner’s Designated Representative" 4.1 The Associate Vice President of Facilities Management will provide general administration of the

Contract. The Assistant Director, Construction Services or his designee will be the Owner's representative during construction and until final payment.

5.0 REF: ARTICLE 3.3.2 “Contractor’s Superintendent” 5.1 TWU requires full-time on-site supervision by dedicated superintendent. The project superintendent

shall only be responsible for this project and site during the duration of the construction period until substantial completion.

6.0 REF: ARTICLE 5.1 Construction Bonds 6.1 The Owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to furnish Payment Bonds on contracts of

$25,000.00 or less, and Performance Bonds on contracts of $100,000.00 or less. 7.0 REF: ARTICLE 6.1.1 “Copies Furnished" 7.1 The Contractor will be furnished up to six (6) complete sets of Contract Drawings and Specifications

free of charge.

June 16, 2011 Supplementary General Conditions - 2 Library Water Infiltration Mitigation

8.0 REF: ARTICLE 8.3.1.4 "Shop Drawings and Submittals" 8.1 All submittals will be subject to review by the Owner and routine review procedures shall be in

accordance with those established by the Owner at a pre-construction conference held at the start of the Work. Items on which submittals are required are listed in the specifications but failure to list an item does not exempt the Contractor from being required to submit on such items if requested by the Architect/Engineer and/or Owner.

9.0 REF: ARTICLE 10.3 "Owner’s Duty to Pay" 9.1 In addition to items listed in this section receipt of the HUB (HSP) Progress Assessment Report

form is also required for payment processing. Refer to Article 1.10 “Monthly Applications for Payment” in Special Conditions for additional information.

10.0 REF: ARTICLE 12.1.1 "Substantial Completion Inspection" 10.1 In addition to items listed in this section. The contractor shall submit the following items to the

Architect: 1. Report of all tests showing satisfactory function of every operable system as required. 2. Listing of outstanding items for all operable systems and equipment. 3. Certification that the Owner's personnel have been instructed in the use, maintenance and

operation of all operable systems and equipment. END OF SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS

June 16, 2011 Special Conditions - 1 Library Water Infiltration Mitigation

TEXAS WOMAN’S UNIVERSITY

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

1.1 GENERAL A. These Special Conditions shall be subject to the requirements of the Uniform General

Conditions and Supplemental Conditions and shall be used in conjunction therewith as a part of the Contract Documents:

1.2 UNIVERSITY POLICIES A. Contractor is responsible for ensuring compliance by his personnel with the following

University policies. 1. Photo identification for all contract workers.

a. All contract workers are required to obtain a photo ID card by completing an identification information form.

b. ID Cards will be prominently displayed attached to the worker’s outer clothing while on University property.

c. A second file picture and the information form will be forwarded to the University Department of Public Safety (DPS)

d. The DPS office will accomplish a record check on each contract worker and retain the file picture and information form for the duration of the contract and then destroy them.

e. A contract worker found to have a felony or assault criminal record will be refused authorization to work on campus and their ID cards will be rescinded.

f. The contractor is responsible of gathering and returning the ID cards to the TWU Facilities Management and Construction Department at the termination of the contract.

g. Initial issue of photo ID cards will be at no cost. Replacement cards can be obtained at the cost of $10.00 per card.

2. Drug Free Work Place a. Texas Woman's University is required by the Drug-Free Work place

Act of 1988 (41 U.S.C.A. 701-707) to notify all contract workers that the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution , possession, or use of a controlled substance in or on any premises or property owned or controlled by the University is prohibited.

3. Smoke Free Environment a. The buildings and parking facilities located at Texas Woman's

University in Denton, Dallas and Houston are designated “smoke-free” except for private residence hall rooms and designated outdoor smoking areas.

1.3 PATENTS AND LICENSES A. Contractor is responsible for determining the need for and obtaining any patent

licenses required by procedures to be used on this Project. B. Contractor shall submit a list of licenses required and copies of licenses obtained as

attachments to the Bid Form. 1.4 ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS A. Pursuant to the State of Texas House Bill 1927 passed April 5, 2001 and Senate May

15, 2001, the contractor may not provide or install any material that contains asbestos. B. Pursuant to the State of Texas House Bill 509 passed April 20, 2001, Texas Woman’s

University has on file and accessible for review asbestos surveys of existing buildings.


C. In the event asbestos or asbestos appearing material is encountered during the course of the Contract, the applicable requirements of Title 40 Code of Federal Regulations, Part 61, Subpart M and Texas Department of Health General Rules, Chapter 101 shall be strictly adhered to.

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR WORK AREA VENTING A. Whenever products are used that emit noxious and/or toxic fumes it will be the

Contractor's responsibility to vent these fumes to the atmosphere. B. Products included in these requirements include, but are not necessarily limited to, the

following: 1. Paint (as used herein means all coating systems materials including primers,

emulsions, epoxy, enamels, sealers, fillers and other applied materials). 2. Adhesives (includes cements, glues, resins, phenols, etc.) 3. Sealants and Caulks (permanently elastic materials, i.e. silicone, latex,

polysulfide, etc.) C. Shut down and lock out all heating and air conditioning system components that are in

supply or pass through the work area. Seal all intake vents. Seal all exhaust vents that do not exhaust outside the building.

1.6 USE OF SITE A. Owner will provide electrical power and water for construction purposes without charge.

Contractor shall furnish all wiring, hoses, fittings, devices and accessories required for his operation and shall remove same at completion of the Work.

1. Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary wiring and extensions for connection to Owner power source.

2. Contractor shall provide licensed electrician to make connection to Owner power source and install in a manner approved by TWU.

B. Throughout the duration of this Project, the Owner will continue to perform normal

activities in and around the building. Proper and safe access to the Owner-occupied areas shall be maintained at all times.

C. The Contractor shall protect and be responsible for any damage to his work or

materials, from the date of the Agreement until the final payment is made, and shall make good without cost to the Owner, any damage or loss that may occur during the period.

D. Storage: 1. Materials will be stored on the project site where designated by the Owner. 2. The Contractor will provide any storage facility required for his equipment. All

storage areas are to be kept clean and free of fire hazards. Dirty or contaminated materials will be removed daily.

1.7 DEMOLITION A. Salvageable items not claimed by the Owner shall be removed from the site. Storage

and/or sale of items on the site is not permitted. B. Where indicated on Drawings as "Salvage-Deliver to Owner” carefully remove

indicated items, clean, store and turn over to Owner. 1.8 WASTE DISPOSAL

A. The Contractor is responsible for the legal disposal of all trash and debris. There shall be no dumping on University property.

B. All trash and debris shall be thoroughly removed from the construction area daily. No

significant amounts of trash or refuse shall be permitted to accumulate in any occupied


areas. Contractor shall keep all exits isles and exit ways clear of any and all obstructions at all times.

C. The contractor shall be responsible to remove all construction debris that become air

borne and drift away from the immediate construction site.

D. Any damage to adjacent property, either public or private, as a result of any construction activity shall be corrected immediately to the owner’s satisfaction.

1.9 TRUCK ACCESS AND PERSONNEL PARKING A. The University will impose a fine of $500.00, per occurrence, for a Contractor owned or

Contractor employee owned motor vehicle traveling or parking on University owned sidewalks, lawn areas or improved areas without the express written approval of the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall exercise extreme care to prevent damage to pavement, walks,

landscaping and other existing facilities and improvements. Any damage resulting from work performed under this contract shall be repaired as directed by the Owner and at no cost to the Owner.

C. Privately owned vehicles and Contractor vehicles not actively engaged in construction

operations shall be parked in the area designated by the Owner.

D. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining temporary Texas Woman's University parking permits for both his and his employee's vehicles. Permits may be obtained from the Department of Public Safety, 303 Administration Drive.

E. Any parking violations issued to vehicles registered to contractors or subcontractors

associated with the construction project must be paid in full prior to final payment by TWU to the General Contractor.

1.10 MONTHLY APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. The Contractor shall recognize that being a State Agency, the time from submission of

application for payment to receipt of payment can be approximately six (6) weeks. B. Contractor's request for payment shall be submitted on the following forms: 1. TWU Document G202 Application and Certificate for Payment. (Electronic file

shall be made available to successful contractor). 2. TWU does not have a standard Continuation Sheet. 3. HUB (HSP) Progress Assessment Report form shall accompany each

application for payment. Failure to do so will prevent payment processing. (Electronic file shall be made available to successful contractor).

1.11 SIGNS A. No signs or advertisements may be displayed without written approval from the Owner. 1.12 CONSTRUCTION TIME AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. The Agreement will include a stipulation that the Work be completed ready for the

Owner's acceptance no later than a date established in the Notice to Proceed, and fully realizing that the Contract will carry liquidated damages provisions.

B. The Agreement will include a stipulation of liquidated damages. The amount to be in

accordance with the schedule as stated in the Special Conditions and assessed per calendar day for each calendar day after the agreed completion date that the Work is not fully certified by the Architect as being Substantially Complete as that stage of completion is defined in the State of Texas Uniform General Conditions for Construction Contracts.


C. REF: UGC ARTICLE 9.10 "Failure to Complete Work within the Contract Time" Should the Contractor fail to complete the Work within the Contract period, including approved

extensions of time, the Owner will suffer financial loss; therefore, for each and every calendar day the Work, or any portion thereof shall remain incomplete, the amount per calendar day given in the following schedule will be deducted from the money due or to become due to the Contractor, not as a penalty, but as agreed liquidated damages and added expense including administrative and inspection costs.

Contract Amount for More Than

Contract Amount To Including

Calendar Day

$ 25,000 $ 50,000 $ 100,000 $ 500,000 $1,000,000

$ 25,000 $ 50,000 $ 100,000 $ 500,000 $1,000,000

$100 $150 $200 $300 $400 $500

1.13 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. Comply with all local, state, and federal laws, regulations, ordinances applicable to this

construction.

B. The following list are applicable codes and regulations that shall be complied with fully in the installation of the work: ADA Accessibility Guidelines ANSI 17.1, Standard for Elevators, Dumbwaiters and Escalators. ASHRAE 62-1989, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. EIA/TIA 568, 569, Standards for Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring, Pathways & Spaces. NEC, National Electric Code. NFPA 10, Portable Fire Extinguishing, Chapter 3. NFPA 13, Standard for the installation of Sprinkler Systems. NFPA 72C, Standard for the Installation, Maintenance and use of Remote Station protective Signaling systems. NFPA 72E, Standard on automatic fire Detectors. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. State of Texas, Energy conservation Design Standard for New State Buildings. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) of the Architectural Barriers Act. State of Texas, Sprinkler rules; Extinguisher Rules; rules and regulations of Sales, Installations, Maintenance and Servicing of Fire Detection and Fire Alarm devices; and systems and Article 5.43.3 Texas Insurance Code. International Building Code or applicable local building code. International Mechanical Code. International Plumbing Code. International Fire Code.

1.14 HISTORICALLY UNDERUTILIZED BUSINESS PLAN A. It is the policy of Texas Woman’s University (TWU) to actively seek the involvement of

Historically Underutilized Businesses (minority-owned and women-owned businesses) in its construction projects as prime contractors, subcontractors, and material suppliers. Further, the State of Texas has adopted a law that requires each agency of the State of Texas, including TWU, to maximize opportunities for Historically Underutilized Businesses (HUBs) to provide materials, supplies, equipment, and services.

B. In effect and until the expiration of one year after final completion, the Owner may require information from the Contractor, and may conduct audits, to assure that the


Plan is being followed/was followed. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the HUB plan will result in the Contractors removal from the University bidders list for future projects.

1.15 CONSTRUCTION WORK LIMITATIONS

A. All buildings will be fully occupied during construction. Contractor shall be allowed access during normal working hours where possible. However, any interruption of service must be coordinated with the Facilities Management Construction Observer’s office.

B. During the course of construction buildings will be occupied. The contractor shall be

required to limit all unnecessary noise. No radios, tape players, or similar equipment will be permitted on the site. The contractor and/or subcontractors, from time to time, may be required by the University to cease any construction activity in which noise, dust, vibration, odor, disruption of utilities or services, or other type of sensory distraction is created. Contractor may be required to perform these activities after normal working hours or on weekends. No additional time extension or additional compensation to the Contract will be granted for delays created by the temporary suspension of work if requested by the University for the above reasons.

C. Smoking is not permitted in any location within the building. The only designated

smoking area accessible to the contractor personnel will be on the exterior at designated areas. Anyone found violating this policy will be immediately asked to leave the project site, and reported to project superintendent. Second violations will result in a permanent ban of each violator from continued working in the buildings.

D. The Contractor shall leave the work site floor free of construction debris at the end of

each day and secure equipment and cover holes in wall or floors opened for construction. The contractor must provide their own cleaning equipment. Use of University equipment will not be allowed.

1.16 CONSTRUCTION KEY POLICY

A. Keys for temporary use during construction will be issued in accordance with the TWU Access Key Control Policy.

B. Keys to doors in construction areas will be provided to the General Contractor. For

each key requested the General Contractor shall submit a key request to the TWU Work Control Department. Keys that are issued will be the responsibility of the General Contractor. Keys remain the property of the State, entrusted to the individual key holder for his/her exclusive use, and must be returned when no longer needed.

C. If keys are lost, stolen or non-returned to the Assistant Director, Construction Services

will determine whether locks require re-keying. The General Contractor will be required to pay to re-key the area affected. Cost to re-key each lock is $35.00. Key replacement cost is $7.00 each.

D. Final payment will not be made to the General Contractor until all keys have been

returned. Payment for any non-returned keys will be deducted from the final payment to the General Contractor.

END OF SPECIAL CONDITIONS

HSP Instructions - 1

HUB Subcontracting Plan (HSP) Instructions

Welcome to the HUB Subcontracting Plan Training Presentation. This presentation provides a general overview and instructions on how to complete the HUB Subcontracting Plan. You are encouraged to have the HUB Subcontracting Plan form in front of you as a reference during the training.. This presentation provides a general overview on how to complete a HUB Subcontracting Plan Please note that if you have questions about completing an agency’s HUB Subcontracting Plan, you should contact the agency’s Purchaser or HUB Coordinator who is identified as the point of contact in the agency’s bid solicitation. The Historically Underutilized Business Program activities are designed to promote full and equal business opportunities for all businesses in the State of Texas. Therefore, in accordance with Gov’t Code §2161.252, the contracting agency has determined that subcontracting opportunities are probable under this contract. Respondents, including State of Texas certified Historically Underutilized Businesses (HUBs), must complete and submit a State of Texas HUB Subcontracting Plan (HSP) with their solicitation response. NOTE: Responses that do not include a completed HSP WILL be rejected pursuant to Gov’t Code §2161.252(b). The percentages located in the second major paragraph at the top of page one of the HUB Subcontracting Plan are goals administered by the State of Texas Comptroller of Public Accounts for each of the listed contract types. These goals are defined in Texas Administrative Code, Title 34, §20.13. Following are directions as to how to properly complete the HUB Subcontracting Plan: SECTION 1 Everyone will complete Section 1. Section 1a: Complete the fields for:

‘Respondent (Company) Name’ ‘State of Texas VID #’ (this is your State of Texas taxpayer ID number) ‘Point of Contact’ at your firm during the solicitation ‘Phone #’ of the primary contact Section 1b; check either ‘Yes’ or ‘No’ if your firm is a certified State of Texas HUB. Remember, even if you are a State of Texas Certified HUB, you must complete the HUB Subcontracting Plan as directed in the following sections. Section 1c: complete by placing the solicitation number in this field.


SECTION 2 Everyone will complete Section 2 and select either ‘Yes’ or ‘No’. Section 2: if you select ‘No, I will not be subcontracting any portion of the contract and will be fulfilling the entire contract with my own resources’: Skip to Section 9 on the third page of the HSP, and state in narrative format your justification, ability, and affirmation to self perform all portions of this contract. Complete Section 10 with your signature, printed name, title, and date. This form must be signed by an authorized representative of your company, and by your signature you affirm that if awarded, your company will comply with the requirements of the HSP and those requirements listed in Section 10. Section 2: if you select ‘Yes, I will be subcontracting portion(s) of the contract’: For every trade that you will subcontract, you must list those trades in the fields provided. For example, if, in a construction solicitation you would be subcontracting mechanical drawings, you would place the trade name ‘mechanical and cad drawings’ on line #1 in Section 2. Complete the lines provided in Section 2 for as many trades as you will subcontract. If you have more than twenty trades to subcontract, simply download the extension from the link provided at the bottom of Section 2 on this first page of the HSP. You may now proceed to Section 3. SECTION 3 - SECTION 8 At the top of page 2 complete the field for ‘Enter your company’s name here’ and ‘solicitation number’. For every trade that you listed in Section 2, you must complete page 2 of the HSP Sections 3 – Section 8; this is where you will document your required ‘Good Faith Effort’ in developing and completing the HSP. As an example, if you listed four trades in Section 2, then you will perform a Good Faith Effort for all four trades, and submit four pages of the HSP containing Section 3 – Section 8. SECTION 3 Section 3: continuing with our example from Section 2 line #1, ‘mechanical and cad drawings’, place the line item number and trade description from Section 2 in the spaces provided in Section 3. Example ‘Line Item #1’, and Description “cad and mechanical drawings.” SECTION 4 If you, the prime contractor (and respondent) are a mentor to the selected subcontractor for this particular trade, and this relationship is documented by an official State of Texas Mentor-Protégé Agreement, you have met the Good Faith Effort for this particular subcontracting opportunity under Texas Administrative Code §20.14, and may select ‘Yes’ and move on to complete Section 8 and Section 10. If your firm does not meet the Mentor-Protégé requirements listed above, select ‘No’, and move on to Section 5.


SECTION 5 This section applies only to Professional Services contracts (as defined by Texas Gov’t Code 2254.002). Contracts that are defined as ‘Professional Services Contracts’ are those that require the services of a licensed professional such as: accounting; architecture; landscape architecture; land surveying; medicine; optometry; professional engineering; real estate appraising; and professional nursing

Normally these services are solicited on a Request for Qualifications (RFQ). If this is not a Professional Services solicitation, then this section does not apply, you may check ‘No’ and proceed to Section 6. If this is a Professional Services solicitation, and the total HUB subcontracting percentage is at least 20% or more of the contract, you have met the Good Faith Effort under Texas Administrative Code §20.14. Select ‘Yes’, and then move on to Section 8 and Section 10. If this is a Professional Services solicitation, and the total HUB subcontracting percentage is less than 20%, you must go on to Section 6 and perform the Good Faith Effort requirements listed in Section 6. Please note that the 20% requirement for Professional Services HUB Subcontracting is the total of all HUB Subcontracting requirements, not a ‘per subcontracting trade’ requirement. SECTION 6 There are three main components of the ‘Good Faith Effort’; you must satisfy all three of the listed components, 6a, 6b, and 6c, and provide supporting documentation:

6a) you must solicit at least three certified HUB vendors, for each trade you plan to subcontract, that provide services or commodities in the applicable trade, from the CMBL & HUB directory located at the link provided 6b) you must provide written notification of the subcontracting opportunities listed in Section 3 to a minority or women trade organization or development centers to assist in identifying potential HUB’s. To locate these organizations, follow the links provided in Section 6b. 6c) you must allow five days for these HUB vendors to respond to your request for quote or bid for the services you are subcontracting. Send your notification to HUB and Minority/Women trade organizations at least five days prior to solicitation submission deadline.

Note that procurement letters, requests for quote or bid, fax logs, phone logs, and emails are proof of your compliance to the Good Faith Effort and should be submitted with your proposal or bid package.


SECTION 7 In this section you will list the three HUB vendors you solicited for the applicable trade listed in Section 3. List the certified HUB vendor’s Company Name, VID number, and the date you contacted the HUB vendor for a quote or bid. Lastly, indicate in the boxes whether or not you received a response to your request for quote or bid from the HUB vendors. Please note that this section is subject to verification by the soliciting Agency’s HUB Coordinator. You must document your notifications to HUB’s and Minority and Women trade organizations and submit with your proposal or bid package. SECTION 8 In this section you will list your chosen subcontractor for the applicable trade. If the vendor you have chosen is not a certified HUB vendor, you must provide, in the space provided at the bottom of Section 8, a brief explanation as to why you did not choose one of your solicited certified HUB vendors (i.e. Best Value, Best Qualified, Lowest Price) SECTION 9 This section applies only if you have chosen ‘No, I will not be subcontracting any portion of the contract’ in Section 2. State in narrative format your justification, ability, and affirmation to self perform any and all portions of this contract. SECTION 10 Complete Section 10 with your signature, printed name, title, and date. The Hub Subcontracting Plan must be signed by an authorized representative of your company, and by your signature you affirm that if awarded, your company will comply with the requirements of the HSP and the requirements listed in Section 10. SUMMARY In summary: If you ARE NOT subcontracting any portion of this contract, complete Section 1, Section 2 select ‘No’, Section 9 and Section 10. If you ARE subcontracting any portion of this contract, complete Section 1, Section 2 select ‘Yes’, complete Section 2 by providing the names of the trades you will be subcontracting, complete Section 3, Section 4 (if applicable), Section 5 (if applicable), Section 6, Section 7, Section 8, and Section 10.

This completes the HUB Subcontracting Plan training presentation. As a reminder, note that if you have questions about completing an agency’s HUB Subcontracting Plan, please contact the agency’s Purchaser or HUB Coordinator who is identified as the point of contact in the agency’s bid solicitation. Thank you for your interest in doing business with the State of Texas.

HUB SUBCONTRACTING PLAN (HSP) In accordance with Gov’t Code §2161.252, the contracting agency has determined that subcontracting opportunities are probable under this contract. Therefore, respondents, including State of Texas certified Historically Underutilized Businesses (HUBs), must complete and submit a State of Texas HUB Subcontracting Plan (HSP) with their solicitation response.

NOTE: Responses that do not include a completed HSP shall be rejected pursuant to Gov’t Code §2161.252(b). The HUB Program promotes equal business opportunities for economically disadvantaged persons to contract with the State of Texas in accordance with the goals specified in the State of Texas Disparity Study. The HUB goals defined in 34 TAC §20.13 are: 11.9 percent for heavy construction other than building contracts, 26.1 percent for all building construction, including general contractors and operative builders contracts, 57.2 percent for all special trade construction contracts, 20 percent for professional services contracts, 33 percent for all other services contracts, and 12.6 percent for commodities contracts.

- - Agency Special Instructions/Additional Requirements - -

SECTION 1 - RESPONDENT AND SOLICITATION INFORMATION

a. Respondent (Company) Name: State of Texas VID #:

Point of Contact: Phone #:

b. Is your company a State of Texas certified HUB? - Yes - No

c. Solicitation #: SECTION 2 - SUBCONTRACTING INTENTIONS

After having divided the contract work into reasonable lots or portions to the extent consistent with prudent industry practices, the respondent must determine what portion(s) of work, including goods or services, will be subcontracted. Note: In accordance with 34 TAC §20.12., a “Subcontractor” means a person who contracts with a vendor to work, to supply commodities, or contribute toward completing work for a governmental entity. Check the appropriate box that identifies your subcontracting intentions:

- Yes, I will be subcontracting portion(s) of the contract. (If Yes, in the spaces provided below, list the portions of work you will be subcontracting, and go to page 2.)

- No, I will not be subcontracting any portion of the contract, and will be fulfilling the entire contract with my own resources. (If No, complete SECTION 9 and 10.)

Line Item # - Subcontracting Opportunity Description Line Item # - Subcontracting Opportunity Description ( #1) - (#11) -

( #2) - (#12) -

( #3) - (#13) -

( #4) - (#14) -

( #5) - (#15) -

( #6) - (#16) -

( #7) - (#17) -

( #8) - (#18) -

( #9) - (#19) -

(#10) - (#20) - *If you have more than twenty subcontracting opportunities, a continuation page is available at http://www.window.state.tx.us/procurement/prog/hub/hub-forms/HUBSubcontractingPlanContinuationPage1.doc

HSP - 1 Rev. 10/07

http://www.window.state.tx.us/procurement/prog/hub/hub-forms/HUBSubcontractingPlanContinuationPage1.doc


Enter your company’s name here: Solicitation #:

IMPORTANT: You must complete a copy of this page for each of the subcontracting opportunities you listed in SECTION 2. You may photocopy this page or download copies at http://www.window.state.tx.us/procurement/prog/hub/hub-forms/HUBSubcontractingPlanContinuationPage2.doc.

SECTION 3 - SUBCONTRACTING OPPORTUNITY Enter the line item number and description of the subcontracting opportunity you listed in SECTION 2. Line Item # Description:

SECTION 4 - MENTOR-PROTÉGÉ PROGRAM If respondent is participating as a Mentor in a State of Texas Mentor Protégé Program, submitting their Protégé (Protégé must be a State of Texas certified HUB) as a subcontractor to perform the portion of work (subcontracting opportunity) listed in SECTION 3, constitutes a good faith effort towards that specific portion of work. Will you be subcontracting the portion of work listed in SECTION 3 to your Protégé?

- Yes (If Yes, complete SECTION 8 and 10.) - No / Not Applicable (If No or Not Applicable, go to SECTION 5.)

SECTION 5 - PROFESSIONAL SERVICES CONTRACTS ONLY This section applies to Professional Services Contracts only. All other contracts go to SECTION 6.

Does your HSP contain subcontracting of 20% or more with HUB(s)? - Yes (If Yes, complete SECTION 8 and 10.) - No / Not Applicable (If No or Not Applicable, go to SECTION 6.)

In accordance with Gov’t Code §2254.004, “Professional Services" means services: (A) within the scope of the practice, as defined by state law of accounting; architecture; landscape architecture; land surveying; medicine; optometry; professional engineering; real estate appraising; or professional nursing; or (B) provided in connection with the professional employment or practice of a person who is licensed or registered as a certified public accountant; an architect; a landscape architect; a land surveyor; a physician, including a surgeon; an optometrist; a professional engineer; a state certified or state licensed real estate appraiser; or a registered nurse.

SECTION 6 - NOTIFICATION OF SUBCONTRACTING OPPORTUNITY Complying with a, b and c of this section constitutes Good Faith Effort towards the portion of work listed in SECTION 3. After performing

the requirements of this section, complete SECTION 7, 8 and 10.

a. Provide written notification of the subcontracting opportunity listed in SECTION 3 to three (3) or more HUBs. Use the State of Texas’ Centralized Master Bidders List (CMBL), found at http://www2.cpa.state.tx.us/cmbl/cmblhub.html, and its HUB Directory, found at http://www2.cpa.state.tx.us/cmbl/hubonly.html, to identify available HUBs. Note: Attach supporting documentation (letters, phone logs, fax transmittals, electronic mail, etc.) demonstrating evidence of the good faith effort performed.

b. Provide written notification of the subcontracting opportunity listed in SECTION 3 to a minority or women trade organization or development center to assist in identifying potential HUBs by disseminating the subcontracting opportunity to their members/participants. A list of trade organizations and development centers may be accessed at http://www.window.state.tx.us/procurement/prog/hub/mwb-links-1/. Note: Attach supporting documentation (letters, phone logs, fax transmittals, electronic mail, etc.) demonstrating evidence of the good faith effort performed.

c. Written notifications should include the scope of the work, information regarding the location to review plans and specifications, bonding and insurance requirements, required qualifications, and identify a contact person. Unless the contracting agency has specified a different time period, you must allow the HUBs no less than five (5) working days from their receipt of notice to respond, and provide notice of your subcontracting opportunity to a minority or women trade organization or development center no less than five (5) working days prior to the submission of your response to the contracting agency.

SECTION 7 - HUB FIRMS CONTACTED FOR SUBCONTRACTING OPPORTUNITY List three (3) State of Texas certified HUBs you notified regarding the portion of work (subcontracting opportunity) listed in SECTION 3. Specify the vendor ID number, date you provided notice, and if you received a response. Note: Attach supporting documentation (letters, phone logs, fax transmittals, electronic mail, etc.) demonstrating evidence of the good faith effort performed. Company Name VID # Notice Date

(mm/dd/yyyy) Was Response Received?

/ / - Yes - No / / - Yes - No / / - Yes - No

SECTION 8 - SUBCONTRACTOR SELECTION List the subcontractor(s) you selected to perform the portion of work (subcontracting opportunity) listed in SECTION 3. Also, specify the expected percentage of work to be subcontracted, the approximate dollar value of the work to be subcontracted, and indicate if the company is a Texas certified HUB.

Company Name VID # Expected % of Contract

Approximate Dollar Amount

Texas Certified HUB?

% $ - Yes - No*

% $ - Yes - No*

*If the subcontractor(s) you selected is not a Texas certified HUB, provide written justification of your selection process below:

HSP - 2 Rev. 10/07


http://www2.cpa.state.tx.us/cmbl/cmblhub.html

http://www2.cpa.state.tx.us/cmbl/hubonly.html

http://www.window.state.tx.us/procurement/prog/hub/mwb-links-1/


SECTION 9 - SELF PERFORMANCE JUSTIFICATION (If you responded “No” to SECTION 2, you must complete SECTION 9 and 10.)

Does your response/proposal contain an explanation demonstrating how your company will fulfill the entire contract with its own resources?

- Yes If Yes, in the space provided below, list the specific page/section of your proposal which identifies how your company will perform the entire contract with its own equipment, supplies, materials and/or employees.

- No If No, in the space provided below, explain how your company will perform the entire contract with its own equipment, supplies, materials, and/or employees.

SECTION 10 - AFFIRMATION

As evidenced by my signature below, I affirm that I am an authorized representative of the respondent listed in SECTION 1, and that the information and supporting documentation submitted with the HSP are true and correct. Respondent understands and agrees that, if awarded any portion of the solicitation:

• The respondent must submit monthly compliance reports (Prime Contractor Progress Assessment Report – PAR) to the contracting agency, verifying their compliance with the HSP, including the use/expenditures they have made to subcontractors. (The PAR is available at http://www.window.state.tx.us/procurement/prog/hub/hub-forms/progressassessmentrpt.xls).

• The respondent must seek approval from the contracting agency prior to making any modifications to their HSP. If the HSP is modified without the contracting agency’s prior approval, respondent may be subject to debarment pursuant to Gov’t Code §2161.253(d).

• The respondent must, upon request, allow the contracting agency to perform on-site reviews of the company’s headquarters and/or work-site where services are to be performed and must provide documents regarding staff and other resources.

____________________________________ _________________________________ ___________________ ___________________ Signature Printed Name Title Date

HSP - 3 Rev. 10/07

http://www.window.state.tx.us/procurement/prog/hub/hub-forms/progressassessmentrpt.xls


SECTION 2 Development of a HSP and Subcontracting Intentions

In the spaces below, continue to list the portions of work (subcontracting opportunities) you intend to subcontract. For each subcontracting opportunity you list, you must demonstrate evidence of Good Faith Effort in developing your HSP by complying with the requirements outlined in the Good Faith Effort Confirmation form (Page 2).

Line Item # - Subcontracting Opportunity Description Line Item # - Subcontracting Opportunity Description (#21) - (#61) - (#22) - (#62) - (#23) - (#63) - (#24) - (#64) - (#25) - (#65) - (#26) - (#66) - (#27) - (#67) - (#28) - (#68) - (#29) - (#69) - (#30) - (#70) - (#31) - (#71) - (#32) - (#72) - (#33) - (#73) - (#34) - (#74) - (#35) - (#75) - (#36) - (#76) - (#37) - (#77) - (#38) - (#78) - (#39) - (#79) - (#40) - (#80) - (#41) - (#81) - (#42) - (#82) - (#43) - (#83) - (#44) - (#84) - (#45) - (#85) - (#46) - (#86) - (#47) - (#87) - (#48) - (#88) - (#49) - (#89) - (#50) - (#90) - (#51) - (#91) - (#52) - (#92) - (#53) - (#93) - (#54) - (#94) - (#55) - (#95) - (#56) - (#96) - (#57) - (#97) - (#58) - (#98) - (#59) - (#99) - (#60) - (#100) -

HSP Continuation - 1

Rev.10/07


IMPORTANT: You must complete a copy of this page for each of the subcontracting opportunities you listed in SECTION 2. You may photocopy this page or download copies at http://www.window.state.tx.us/procurement/prog/hub/hub-forms/HUBSubcontractingPlanContinuationPage2.doc.

SECTION 3 - SUBCONTRACTING OPPORTUNITY Enter the line item number and description of the subcontracting opportunity you listed in SECTION 2. Line Item # Description:

SECTION 4 - MENTOR-PROTÉGÉ PROGRAM If respondent is participating as a Mentor in a State of Texas Mentor Protégé Program, submitting their Protégé (Protégé must be a State of Texas certified HUB) as a subcontractor to perform the portion of work (subcontracting opportunity) listed in SECTION 3, constitutes a good faith effort towards that specific portion of work. Will you be subcontracting the portion of work listed in SECTION 3 to your Protégé?

- Yes (If Yes, complete SECTION 8 and 10.) - No / Not Applicable (If No or Not Applicable, go to SECTION 5.)

SECTION 5 - PROFESSIONAL SERVICES CONTRACTS ONLY This section applies to Professional Services Contracts only. All other contracts go to SECTION 6.

Does your HSP contain subcontracting of 20% or more with HUB(s)? - Yes (If Yes, complete SECTION 8 and 10.) - No / Not Applicable (If No or Not Applicable, go to SECTION 6.)

In accordance with Gov’t Code §2254.004, “Professional Services" means services: (A) within the scope of the practice, as defined by state law of accounting; architecture; landscape architecture; land surveying; medicine; optometry; professional engineering; real estate appraising; or professional nursing; or (B) provided in connection with the professional employment or practice of a person who is licensed or registered as a certified public accountant; an architect; a landscape architect; a land surveyor; a physician, including a surgeon; an optometrist; a professional engineer; a state certified or state licensed real estate appraiser; or a registered nurse.

SECTION 6 - NOTIFICATION OF SUBCONTRACTING OPPORTUNITY Complying with a, b and c of this section constitutes Good Faith Effort towards the portion of work listed in SECTION 3. After performing

the requirements of this section, complete SECTION 7, 8 and 10.

a. Provide written notification of the subcontracting opportunity listed in SECTION 3 to three (3) or more HUBs. Use the State of Texas’ Centralized Master Bidders List (CMBL), found at http://www2.cpa.state.tx.us/cmbl/cmblhub.html, and its HUB Directory, found at http://www2.cpa.state.tx.us/cmbl/hubonly.html, to identify available HUBs. Note: Attach supporting documentation (letters, phone logs, fax transmittals, electronic mail, etc.) demonstrating evidence of the good faith effort performed.

b. Provide written notification of the subcontracting opportunity listed in SECTION 3 to a minority or women trade organization or development center to assist in identifying potential HUBs by disseminating the subcontracting opportunity to their members/participants. A list of trade organizations and development centers may be accessed at http://www.window.state.tx.us/procurement/prog/hub/mwb-links-1/. Note: Attach supporting documentation (letters, phone logs, fax transmittals, electronic mail, etc.) demonstrating evidence of the good faith effort performed.

c. Written notifications should include the scope of the work, information regarding the location to review plans and specifications, bonding and insurance requirements, required qualifications, and identify a contact person. Unless the contracting agency has specified a different time period, you must allow the HUBs no less than five (5) working days from their receipt of notice to respond, and provide notice of your subcontracting opportunity to a minority or women trade organization or development center no less than five (5) working days prior to the submission of your response to the contracting agency.

SECTION 7 - HUB FIRMS CONTACTED FOR SUBCONTRACTING OPPORTUNITY List three (3) State of Texas certified HUBs you notified regarding the portion of work (subcontracting opportunity) listed in SECTION 3. Specify the vendor ID number, date you provided notice, and if you received a response. Note: Attach supporting documentation (letters, phone logs, fax transmittals, electronic mail, etc.) demonstrating evidence of the good faith effort performed. Company Name VID # Notice Date

(mm/dd/yyyy) Was Response Received?

/ / - Yes - No / / - Yes - No / / - Yes - No

SECTION 8 - SUBCONTRACTOR SELECTION List the subcontractor(s) you selected to perform the portion of work (subcontracting opportunity) listed in SECTION 3. Also, specify the expected percentage of work to be subcontracted, the approximate dollar value of the work to be subcontracted, and indicate if the company is a Texas certified HUB.

Company Name VID # Expected % of Contract

Approximate Dollar Amount

Texas Certified HUB?

% $ - Yes - No*

% $ - Yes - No*

*If the subcontractor(s) you selected is not a Texas certified HUB, provide written justification of your selection process below:

HSP Continuation - 2

Rev. 10/07


http://www2.cpa.state.tx.us/cmbl/cmblhub.html


http://www.window.state.tx.us/procurement/prog/hub/mwb-links-1/

Date of Award: Object Code:(mm/dd/yyyy) (Agency Use Only)

State of Texas VID #:

Phone #:

Subcontractor’s VID or HUB Certificate Number

*Texas Certified

HUB? (Yes or No)

Total Contract $ Amount from HSP with Subcontractor

Total $ Amount Paid This Reporting Period

to Subcontractor

Total Contract $ Amount Paid to Date

to SubcontractorObject Code (Agency Use Only)

-$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$

Rev. 10/07*Note: HUB certification status can be verified on-line at: http://www2.cpa.state.tx.us/cmbl/hubonly.html

Reporting (Month) Period:

Contract/Requisition Number:

Contracting Agency/University Name:

Contractor (Company) Name:

Point of Contact:

Signature: _____________________________________________ Title: _____________________________ Date: _____________________

HUB Subcontracting Plan (HSP)Prime Contractor Progress Assessment Report

TOTALS:

Report HUB and Non-HUB subcontractor information

This form must be completed and submitted to the contracting agency each month to document compliance with your HSP.

Subcontractor’s Name

-$ Total Amount Paid this Reporting Period to


June 16, 2011 Prevailing Wage Rates - 1 Library Water Infiltration Mitigation

PREVAILING WAGE SCHEDULE In accordance with Article 2, paragraph 2.2, Uniform General Conditions, the minimum prevailing wage rates for this project shall be: GENERAL DECISION: TX20100057 03/12/2010 TX57 Date: March 12, 2010 General Decision Number: TX20100057 03/12/2010 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20080057 State: Texas Construction Type: Building Counties: Collin and Denton Counties in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes and apartments up to and including 4 stories). Use current heavy and highway General Wage Determination for Paving and Utilities incidental to Building Construction.) Modification Number Publication Date 0 03/12/2010 * IRON0263-001 06/01/2009 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER (Structural)..........$ 21.60 4.40 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * SUTX1989-002 11/01/1989 Rates Fringes Acoustical Installer.............$ 12.27 CARPENTER (Excluding Acoustical Installers & Drywall Hangers).................$ 12.36 1.38 DRYWALL HANGER...................$ 12.17 ELECTRICIAN......................$ 13.10 1.97 Laborer, Unskilled (Excluding Landscape Laborers)..............$ 7.25 .86 Painters: Brush & Spray...............$ 10.15 Painters doing drywall finishing only..............$ 10.08 PAPERHANGER......................$ 12.50 2.20


Plumbers and Pipefitters (Including HVAC Work)............$ 12.47 1.87 Power Equipment Operator Cranes......................$ 15.00 2.85 ROOFER, Including Built Up, Composition and Single Ply Roofs............................$ 10.17 1.10 Sheet metal worker (Including HVAC Duct Work)..................$ 10.94 1.45 SPRINKLER FITTER.................$ 12.00 2.30 ----------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates listed under the identifier do not reflect collectively bargained wage and fringe benefit rates. Other designations indicate unions whose rates have been determined to be prevailing. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.)


and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION

PROJ. NO.: DE-11-035-RB-008 TEXAS WOMAN'S UNIVERSITY FS2008-11-000 (SG 00811.000) LIBRARY WATER INFILTRATION MITIGATION 06/16/11

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 006325 - 1

SECTION 006325

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

DATE:

TO:

ATTENTION:

PROJECT:

We submit for your consideration the following product as a substitution for the specified product: Section No. Paragraph Specified Product __________ __________ __________________________________________ Proposed Substitution: _________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________

Product Data: Attach complete technical data for the proposed substitution. Include information on

changes to Contract Documents that proposed substitution will require for its proper installation.

Samples: [ ] Attached [ ] Will be furnished up request

Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings: [ ] No [ ] Yes (explain)__________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________

Effects of proposed substitution on other Work:

_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________

Differences between proposed substitution and specified product:

_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 006325 - 2

Manufacturer's warranties of the proposed substitution and specified products are:

[ ] Same [ ] Different (explain)______________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________

Maintenance service and spare parts are available for proposed substitution from:

_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________

Previous installations where proposed substitution may be seen:

Project: Project: Owner: Owner: Architect: Architect: Date Installed: Date Installed:

Cost savings to be realized by Owner, if proposed substitution is accepted:

_______________________________________________________________________

Change in Contract Time, if proposed substitution is accepted: [ ] No Change [ ] Add _____ days [ ] Deduct _____ days

Submittal constitutes a representation that Contractor has read and agrees to the provisions of Section 01600.

Submitted By Contractor:

_____________________________________ Signature _____________________________________ Firm

For Use by Architect Based on the information supplied by the Contractor, the Architect has reviewed the

proposed substitution on the basis of design concept of the Work and conformance with information in Contract Documents.

[ ] Accepted [ ] Accepted as Noted [ ] Rejected [ ] Submit Additional Information:__________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ By:______________________ Date:______________________

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000

SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 PROJECT

A. Project Name: Texas Woman's University Library Water Infiltration Mitigation

B. Owner's Name: Texas Woman's University.

C. Architect's Name: SmithGroup|F&S, Dallas, Texas.

D. The project consists of the mitigation of water infiltration into the existing TWU Library. Steps involve excavation around the foundation, removal of existing brick, removal of existing French drain system, installation of two layer base of wall, through wall flashing, and reinstallation of brick. Scope also includes tying existing downspouts into storm drainage system as well as adding two new copper gutters and downspouts.

1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION

A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price.

1.03 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. Owner intends to occupy completed areas of construction.

B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations.

C. Building shall remain occupied during construction. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.

1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES

A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings.

B. Arrange use of site and premises to allow: 1. Work by Others. 2. Work by Owner.

C. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner:

D. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered.

E. Time Restrictions: 1. Perform work only between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. Monday through Friday. 2. Limit condut of especially noisy work to the hours agreed upon by the Owner. 3. Coordinate construction schedule with Owner to minimize conflicts with Owner planned

events.

F. Utility Outages and Shutdown: 1. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities.

G. Use of Tobacco Products: 1. Comply with University policy.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012000 - 1

SECTION 012000

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments.

B. Change procedures.

C. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

B. General and Supplementary Conditions: Percentage allowances for Construction Manager's overhead and profit.

C. Section 012100 - Allowances: Payment procedures relating to allowances.

1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval.

B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted.

C. Submit Schedule of Values at least 20 days prior to submitting first Application for Payment.

D. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. 1. Lists installed value of component parts of Work in sufficient detail to serve as basis for

computing values for progress payments. 2. Include separate line items for:

a. Site mobilization. b. Bonds and insurance. c. Contractor's overhead and profit. d. Trench safety systems. e. Separate material and labor cost in compliance with Tax Bill 1H.B.11 - sales tax on

tangible personal property.

E. For items on which payment will be requested for stored materials, break down value into: 1. Cost of materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid. 2. Total installed value.

F. Total of costs listed in Schedule shall equal Contract Sum.

G. Upon request of Owner or Architect, furnish additional data to support values given that will substantiate their correctness.

H. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment.

I. Reviewed Schedule of Values will be used as basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

J. Review and Resubmittal: 1. After initial review by Owner and Architect, revise and resubmit if required.



2. Revise and resubmit along with next Application for Payment when a Change Order is

issued. List each Change Order as a new line item.

1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement.

B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted.

C. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer.

D. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed.

E. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work.

F. Submit four copies of each Application for Payment.

G. Include the following with the application: 1. Transmittal letter as specified for Submittals in Section 013000. 2. Work completed through 20th day of each month. 3. Materials stored at project site but not incorporated into work. 4. Materials ready to be installed and stored at the Project Site or at another location agreed

upon. 5. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 013000. 6. Current construction photographs specified in Section 013000. 7. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors.

a. Beginning with second Application for Payment, submit waivers of lien from Contractor and each subcontractor or sub-subcontractor included on the previous month's Application for Payment.

b. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, prior to deduction of retainage.

c. For completed items, submit full or final waiver.

H. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description.

1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

A. For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, Architect will issue instructions directly to Contractor.

B. For other required changes, Architect will issue a document signed by Owner instructing Construction Manager to proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of determining

any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change.

C. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Architect will issue a document that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change. Construction Manager shall prepare and submit a estimated price quotation within 7 days.

D. Construction Manager may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 016000.



E. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Construction Change Owner’s Contingency Authorization (CCOCA) for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.

1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT

A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying original Contract Sum, total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, retainage withheld from previous payments, and sum remaining due.

B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 017000.



END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ALLOWANCES 012100 - 1

SECTION 012100

ALLOWANCES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Contingency allowance.

D. Payment and modification procedures relating to allowances.


A. Section 012000 - Price and Payment Procedures: Additional payment and modification procedures.

1.03 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE

A. Include in Contract Sum a contingency allowance, as scheduled, for use upon Owner's instruction.

B. Contractor's costs for products, delivery, installation, labor, insurance, payroll, and equipment rental will be included in Change Orders authorizing expenditure of funds from this Contingency Allowance.

C. Funds will be drawn from the Contingency Allowance only by Contingency Allowance Expenditure Authorization executed on the attached form following this section

D. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Contingency Allowance will be credited to Owner by Change Order.

E. The Owner’s Construction Contingency is part of the Contract. Contractor’s overhead, profit,

bonds, and insurance for this contingency are included in the Total Base Price on the Proposal Form. No amounts for overhead, profit, general conditions, bonds, and insurance will be added to subcontracts or work performed by the General Contractor’s forces issued under the Owner’s Contingency. Funds from the Owner’s Contingency may be expended for various amounts at the discretion of and as approved by the Owner. There are no minimum amounts required for use of these funds. These funds will be used as a contingency reduction and tracked on a Contingency Proposal Log and Construction Change Owner’s Contingency Authorization forms. Unused contingency at the end of the project will be removed from the contract via change order.

1.05 ALLOWANCES SCHEDULE

A. Include in the Base Bid Contract Sum the following Allowances: 1. Allowance No. 1: Include the stipulated sum of $30,000.00 as an owner's contingency..



END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013000 - 1

SECTION 013000

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Preconstruction meeting.

B. Progress meetings.

C. Pre-Closeout meeting.

D. Construction progress schedule.

E. Progress photographs.

F. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.

G. Submittal procedures.


A. General Conditions..

B. Section 013216 - Construction Progress Schedule: Form, content, and administration of schedules.

C. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements.

D. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Owner will schedule a meeting in accordance with the General Conditions.

B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect and principal consultants. 3. Construction Manager. 4. Major subcontractors and suppliers as Contractor deems appropriate. 5. Representatives of Testing Laboratory and Inspection Agency.

C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Construction Manager Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Notice to Proceed. 4. Regulatory requirements. 5. Relation and coordination of various parties, and responsible personnel for each party. 6. Use of premises, including office and storage areas, temporary controls, and security

procedures. 7. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. 8. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress

schedule. 9. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, Owner, Contractor, and

Architect. 10. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for

payments, proposal requests, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.



11. Project coordination. 12. Project meetings. 13. Testing agency. 14. Consulting engineer inspections. 15. Scheduling and critical work sequencing. 16. Procedures for maintaining contract closeout submittals. 17. Mold prevention measures.

D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Schedule and administer periodic progress meetings at Contractor's project field office as required by Work progress.

B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings.

C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect, and consultants, and others as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.

D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Maintenance of progress schedule. 7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 8. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 9. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 11. Other business relating to Work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.03 PRE-CLOSEOUT MEETING

A. Schedule approximately 30 days prior to expected date of Substantial Completion at project field office or other central site, convenient to all parties.

B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect and principal consultants. 3. Construction Manager. 4. Major subcontractors and suppliers as Contractor deems appropriate.

C. Agenda: 1. Review of punch list procedures and requirements. 2. Specific requirements for Substantial Completion. 3. Requirements for Certificate of Occupancy 4. Coordination of Owner move-in dates. 5. Procedures and schedule for turning over contract closeout submittals.

D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.



3.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - See Section 013216

3.05 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Submit photographs with each application for payment, taken not more than 3 days prior to submission of application for payment.

B. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files.

C. Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work produced by an experienced photographer, acceptable to Architect.

D. In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following events: 1. Completion of site clearing. 2. Excavations in progress. 3. Foundations in progress and upon completion. 4. Structural framing in progress and upon completion. 5. Enclosure of building, upon completion. 6. Interior finish-out in progress and upon completion. 7. Final completion, minimum of ten (10) photos.

E. Views: 1. Provide non-aerial photographs from four cardinal views at each specified time, until Date

of Substantial Completion. 2. Consult with Architect for instructions on views required. 3. Provide factual presentation. 4. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of

field, and minimum distortion.

F. Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1600 by 1200 ("2 megapixel"), in JPG format; provide files unaltered by photo editing software. 1. Delivery Medium: Via email or on photo CD. 2. File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view identification. 3. Photo CD(s): Provide 1 copy, with files organized in separate folders by submittal date.

3.06 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. The Contractor may, after exercising due diligence to locate required information, request from the Architect clarification or interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect shall, with reasonable promptness, respond to such Contractor's requests for clarification or interpretation. However, if the information requested by the Contractor is apparent from field observations, is contained in the Contract Documents or is reasonably inferable from them, the Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for all reasonable costs charged by the Architect to the Owner for the additional services required to provide such information.

B. Requests for interpretation will be accepted from the Contractor or Owner only in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions.

C. Requests for interpretation shall include only those items that require written interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents.

D. Requests for interpretation shall not be used to submit products or request a product substitution. Make product substitution requests in accordance with the time limitations and procedures established in Section 01600. See below for product submittal procedures.

E. When a request for interpretation involves installation issues, provide recommended solutions along with request for interpretation.

3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. The Architect shall review and approve or take other appropriate action on the Contractor



submittals, such as shop drawings, product data, samples and other data, which the Contractor is required to submit, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the design concept and the information shown in the Construction Documents. This review shall not include review of the accuracy or completeness of details, such as quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges, fabrication processes, construction means or methods, coordination of the work with other trades or construction safety precautions, all of which are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. The Architect's review shall be conducted with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's judgement to permit adequate review. Review of a specific item shall not indicate that the Architect has reviewed the entire assembly of which the item is a component. The Architect shall not be responsible for any deviations from the Construction Documents not brought to the attention of the Architect in writing by the Contractor. The Architect shall not be required to review partial submissions or those for which submissions of correlated items have not been received.

B. All submittals, except for Closeout Submittals and samples, shall be submitted electronically in PDF format or other format acceptable to the Architect and Owner.

C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data.

a. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplements manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to Project.

b. Product data cut sheets that include multiple products without clearly identifying product being submitted will be rejected.

2. Shop drawings. a. Present in clear and thorough manner. Use appropriate text sizes, line weights, line

spacing, etc., to ensure information presented is readable when reduced to half-size. b. Identify detail by reference to sheet and detail numbers or room number shown on

Drawings. c. Use of Architect's Electronic CADD Files: Electronic copies of Architectural drawings

will be made available for use by the Contractor for the express purpose of aiding in the preparation of Shop Drawings for this Project under the following conditions: 1) CADD files shall be used in shop drawing preparation only. Duplication of

CADD files for use as shop drawings is not acceptable. 2) Execute an "Agreement and Release For CADD Files" provided by Architect.

See Document 00 62 00. 3) One copy of the electronic files will be translated to the required format, burned

onto a Cd rom and provided to the Contractor at a cost of $1000.00. 4) The electronic files used for this purpose will be those that were used to plot the

bidding documents. No modifications, additions or deletions will be performed on the files except that Architect's title block and seal will be removed.

5) Each electronic file will represent one Contract Document drawing sheet. 6) Contractor will be responsible for distribution of electronic files to sub-contractors

and suppliers. 7) Any additional copies of electronic files will be provided as follows:

(a) Execute an "Agreement and Release Form For CADD Files" for each request for additional files.

(b) Pay Architect $500.00 for each electronic file requested. 8) Contractor's use of electronic copies of CADD files is subject to terms listed

above, and the execution of the "Agreement and Release Form For CADD Files." Contractor shall fully comply with requirements set forth in the latest edition of Texas Board of Architectural Examiners Rules and Regulations of the Board, Regulating the Practice of Architecture.

9) CADD files are offered for convenience of Contractor at Architect's sole discretion, and may be withheld by Architect for any reason deemed appropriate. Architect may do so without recourse by Contractor, including claims for damages, additional cost or time to the Contract.



10) Electronic copies of the Engineering CADD files will be made available to Contractor at the sole discretion of the appropriate Engineering Consultant in accordance with that Consultant's policies and procedures. Contractor shall obtain Engineering CADD files directly from each Engineering Consultant.

3. Samples a. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of Products, with

integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.

b. Samples for selection. 1) Where so indicated, submit samples of finishes from the full range of

manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect's selection. c. Samples for verification. d. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.

D. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

E. Properly identify each submittal with the appropriate specification section number. Do not combine items from multiple specification sections into one submittal. Submittals that do not comply with these requirements will be rejected.

F. Submittals that include request for substitutions items will be rejected. Submit substitution requests in accordance with Section 01 60 00.

G. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.

H. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 017800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.

3.08 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates.

a. Submit to Architect in quantities specified for Product Data. b. Indicate that material or Product conforms to or exceed specified requirements.

Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. c. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be

acceptable to Architect. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions.

a. Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, startup, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data.

b. Identify conflicts between manufacturer's instructions and Contract Documents. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated.

B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be taken.

3.09 SUBMITTALS FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Assurance submittals specified in Section 01400 are for information and do not require

Architect's responsive action except to require resubmission of incomplete or incorrect information.



3.10 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. In accordance with Section 017800.

B. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities. 2. Project record documents. 3. Operation and maintenance data. 4. Warranties. 5. Bonds. 6. Other types as indicated.

C. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.

3.11 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS

A. Documents for Review: Submit one electronic copy. When printed, electronic documents shall not be larger than 22 x 34 inches (ANSI D). Printing and distribution to sub-contractors and suppliers shall be the Contractor's responsibility.

B. Documents for Information: Submit one electronic copy.

C. Documents for Project Closeout: Make one reproduction of submittal originally reviewed. Submit one extra of submittals for information.

D. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Construction Manager unless specifically so

stated.

3.12 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Transmit each submittal with approved form.

B. Sequentially number the submittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix in accordance with the Pre-Construction Conference Agenda.

C. Identify Project, Construction Manager, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy.

D. Apply Construction Manager's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

E. Deliver submittals to Architect at business address. Deliver electronic submittals to Architect's FTP site.

F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.

G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.

H. Provide space for Construction Manager and Architect review stamps.

I. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.

J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.

K. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 013216 - 1

SECTION 013216

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Preliminary schedule.

B. Construction progress schedule, bar chart type.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Within 10 days after date of Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work.

B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.

C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review.

D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.

E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.

F. Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Construction Manager requires, plus two copies that will be retained by Architect.

G. Submit under transmittal letter form specified in Section 013000.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Scheduler: Construction Manager's personnel or specialist Consultant specializing in CPM scheduling with one years minimum experience in scheduling construction work of a complexity comparable to this Project, and having use of computer facilities capable of delivering a detailed graphic printout within 48 hours of request.

1.04 SCHEDULE FORMAT

A. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity with the applicable specification section number.

B. Diagram Sheet Size: Maximum 22 x 17 inches or width required.

C. Scale and Spacing: To allow for notations and revisions.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE

A. Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart.

3.02 CONTENT

A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction.

B. Identify each item by specification section number.

C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month.

D. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used.


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 013216 - 2

3.03 BAR CHARTS

A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation.

B. Identify the first work day of each week.

3.04 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE

A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Architect at each submittal.

B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule.

C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 10 days.

3.05 UPDATING SCHEDULE

A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities.

B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity.

C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work.

D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable changes.

E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion.

F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes.

3.06 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE

A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to Construction Manager's project site file, to Subcontractors, suppliers, Architect, Owner, and other concerned parties.

B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

SECTION 014000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. References and standards.

B. Specification Format.

C. Quality assurance submittals.

D. Mock-ups.

E. Control of installation.

F. Tolerances.

G. Testing and inspection services.

H. Manufacturers' field services.


A. General Conditions: Inspections and approvals required by public authorities.

B. Section 012100 - Allowances: Allowance for payment of testing services.

C. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.

D. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Design Data and Calculations: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for the Owner, for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 1. Accuracy of design data and calculations is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. When so specified, prepare design data and calculations under the direction of a

professional engineer licensed in the state in which the Project is located.

B. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Construction Manager or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit

supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be

acceptable to Architect.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. 1. Identify conflicts between manufacturer's instructions and requirements of Contract

Documents.

D. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect for information. 2. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information

given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.



1.04 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

C. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code.

D. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.

E. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion.

F. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

G. Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and where the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, refer requirements that are different but apparently equal and other uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.

H. The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.

I. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.

1.05 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT

A. These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications Institute's MasterFormat 2004 numbering system.

B. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions regarding the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents

is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied but not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others when so noted.

3. The words "shall be" are implied wherever a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES

A. Except as indicated otherwise in individual Sections, Owner will employ and pay for services of



an independent testing agency to perform specified testing and inspection.

B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Construction Manager of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.

G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.

3.02 MOCK-UPS

A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections.

B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.

C. Erect at project site at location acceptable to Owner/Project Manager and Architect.

D. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.

E. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so.

F. Some product specification sections specify that mock-ups may remain in place as part of the Work. This applies only to mock-ups that have been approved by the Architect. .

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. See individual specification sections for testing and inspection required.

B. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Construction Manager in



performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Construction Manager of observed irregularities or

non-conformance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings when needed. 7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. 8. Track all non-complying work in subsequent reports until work has been corrected and

re-inspected.

C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Construction Manager. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.

D. Construction Manager Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be

used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to

manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be

tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

4. Notify Architect and laboratory in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.

5. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Construction Manager beyond specified requirements.

E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect.

F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Construction Manager.

3.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES

A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

C. Submit reports in duplicate to Architect for review within 30 days of observation.

3.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT

A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.

B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Temporary telecommunications services.

B. Temporary sanitary facilities.

C. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.

D. Security requirements.

E. Vehicular access and parking.

F. Waste removal facilities and services.

G. Field offices.


A. Section 015100 - Temporary Utilities.

1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES - See Section 015100

1.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES

A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project mobilization.

B. Telecommunications services shall include: 1. Windows-based personal computer dedicated to project telecommunications, with

necessary software and laser printer. 2. Telephone Land Lines: One line, minimum; one handset per line. 3. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; DSL modem or faster, with wireless access. 4. Email: Account/address reserved for project use. 5. Facsimile Service: Minimum of one dedicated fax machine/printer, with dedicated phone

line. 6. Scanner: Access to large scale scanner for scanning of submittals and shop drawings.

1.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.

B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.

1.06 BARRIERS

A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations.

B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way.

C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.

1.07 FENCING

A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence.

B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks.



1.08 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES

A. Provide temporary weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks.

1.09 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES

A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as indicated to separate work areas from Owner-occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner-occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment.

B. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces:

1.10 SECURITY

A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.

1.11 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING

A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.

B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.

C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.

D. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking.

1.12 WASTE REMOVAL

A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition.

B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically.

C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.

1.13 FIELD OFFICES AND TEMPORARY STRUCTURES

A. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table.

B. Provide facilities for storage of Project Record Documents.

C. Temporary Structures: Portable or mobile buildings, structurally sound, weathertight, with floors raised above ground. Temperature transmission resistance shall be compatible with occupancy and storage requirements. Provide connections for utility services when required. Provide steps and landings at entrances.

1.14 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS

A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection.

B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated.

C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.

D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.





END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TEMPORARY UTILITIES 015100 - 1

SECTION 015100

TEMPORARY UTILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, and water.


A. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: 1. Temporary telecommunications services for administrative purposes. 2. Temporary sanitary facilities required by law.

1.03 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY

A. Provide temporary electric feeder from existing building electrical service at location as directed.

B. Complement existing power service capacity and characteristics as required.

C. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required. Provide flexible power cords as required.

D. Provide main service disconnect and over-current protection at convenient location and meter.

E. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.

F. Maintain distribution system and provide routine repairs.

1.04 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES

A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operationsand security purposes.

B. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.

C. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.

1.05 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE

A. Provide and maintain suitable quality water service for construction operations at time of project mobilization.

B. Connect to existing water source. 1. Exercise measures to conserve water.

C. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing.

D . Maintain distribution system and provide routine repairs.



END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. General product requirements.

B. Re-use of existing products.

C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.

D. Product option requirements.

E. Substitution limitations and procedures.

F. Procedures for Owner-supplied products.

G. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.


A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. 16 CFR 260 - Guides for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims; Federal Trade Commission; current edition.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards,

manufacturer, trade name, and model or catalog designation.

B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's

standard colors, textures, and patterns.

E. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS

A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.

B. Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the Owner; notify Owner promptly upon discovery; protect, remove, handle, and store as directed by Owner.

C. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re-used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner, become the property of the Construction Manager; remove from site.

D. Reused Products: Reused products include materials and equipment previously used in this or other construction, salvaged and refurbished as specified.

2.02 NEW PRODUCTS

A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.

B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made outside the United States, its territories, Canada, or Mexico, unless indicated

otherwise in individual specification sections. 2. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's, or Asbestos. Comply with State of Texas

H.B. 1927.

C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture for components being replaced.

D. Motors: Refer to Section 220513, NEMA MG 1 Type. Specific motor type is specified in individual specification sections.

E. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box.

F. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections.

2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description.

B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.

C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named using Substitution Request Form. Specified product establishes required standard of quality.

D. Products specified by stating that Contract Documents based on products by a single manufacturer followed by the statement "Equivalent products by the following manufacturers are acceptable:" 1. Select specified Product or a Product by a named manufacturer having equivalent or

superior characteristics to the specified Product, and meeting requirements of the Contract Documents.

2. If specified Product is not selected, submit Product Data to substantiate compliance of proposed Product with specified requirements.

3. Specified Product establishes the required standard of quality.

E. Products specified by naming one or more Products or manufacturers followed by the statement



"Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements": 1. Submit a Substitution Request Form for Products not named. 2. Specified Product establishes required standard of quality.

F. Products specified by naming only one Product and manufacturer followed by the statement "Substitutions not permitted": 1. Substitutions will not be allowed.

G. Products specified by naming multiple Products and/or manufacturers followed by the statement "Substitutions not permitted": 1. Select one of the specified products or an equivalent product from one of the listed

manufacturers. 2. Substitutions of other products or manufacturers will not be allowed.

H. Products specified by required performance or attributes, without naming a manufacturer or Product: 1. Select any Product meeting specified requirements. 2. Submit data to substantiate compliance of proposed Product with specified requirements.

2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

A. No requests for Substitution will be considered during bid period. Architect will consider requests for Substitution within 30 days after award of Contract. After initial 30 day period, requests for Substitutions will be considered only due to non availability of specified Product. 1. In case of non-availability, notify Architect in writing as soon as non-availability becomes

apparent. 2. If a substitution request is made, and the substituted product is not available in the

specified color, a custom color which matches the specified color shall be provided at no additional cost.

B. Submit Substitution Requests using a copy of Substitution Request Form.

C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents, including: 1. Product identification, including name and address of manufacturer. 2. Product description, performance and test data, and reference standards. 3. Sample, if requested. 4. Description of any anticipated effect that acceptance of proposed Substitution will have on

Progress Schedule, construction methods, or other items of Work. 5. Description of any differences between specified product and proposed Substitution.

D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality

level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the

Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become

apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with



re-approval by authorities.

E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written Substitution Request Form, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.

F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit one electronic PDF file of request for substitution. Limit each request to one

proposed substitution. 2. Submit electronic PDF files of shop drawings, product data, and certified test results

attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. Deliver substitution requests to Architect's FTP site. 4. The Architect will notify Construction Manager in writing of decision to accept or reject

request.

3.02 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS

A. See Section 011000 - Summary for identification of Owner-supplied products.

B. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 2. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Construction Manager. 3. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient

items.

C. Construction Manager's Responsibilities: 1. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with

Owner. 2. Handle, store, install and finish products. 3. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.

3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials.

B. Coordinate delivery of Products to prevent conflict with Work and adverse conditions at site.

C. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas.

E. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

G. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.

3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.

D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product.



E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.

F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.

G. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.

H. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.

I. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

J. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 1

SECTION 017000

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.

B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances.

C. Pre-installation meetings.

D. Cutting and patching.

E. Surveying for laying out the work.

F. Cleaning and protection.

G. Starting of systems and equipment.

H. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.

I. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures.

J. General requirements for maintenance service.


A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures.

B. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures.

C. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures.

D. Section 015100 - Temporary Utilities: Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating facilities.

E. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties and bonds.

F. Individual Product Specification Sections: 1. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of certificate signed by the Land Surveyor, or Professional Engineer that the

elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.

a. Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for the Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by the Surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines and levels of the Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1) Submit 5 copies of final property survey. 2) At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with

local governing authorities as the official “Property Survey”.

C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.



2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. 6. Include in request:

a. Identification of Project. b. Location and description of affected work. c. Necessity for cutting or alteration. d. Description of proposed work and Products to be used including:

1) Scope of cutting and patching. 2) Contractor and trades to execute work 3) Extent of refinishing.

e. Alternatives to cutting and patching. f. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor, or on structural, weatherproof, or

visual integrity of project. g. Written permission of affected separate Contractor. h. Cost proposal, if applicable. i. Date and time work will be executed.

D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities.

E. If conditions of work or schedule necessitate a change of material from that originally installed, submit written request in accordance with Section 01600 using Document 01631 - Substitution Request Form.

F. Submit written notice to Architect designating time work will be uncovered to allow for observation.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. For survey work employ a qualified professional engineer or land surveyor registered in Texas and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate.

B. For field engineering employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in the State of Texas.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment.

B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion.

C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property.

E. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. 1. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time. 2. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow. 3. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or

clays. 4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly

apply corrective measures.



F. Rinsing and/or cleaning of concrete trucks on project site, surrounding sites and city streets is prohibited.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. See Section 011000 for occupancy-related requirements.

B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

C. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.

D. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

G. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.

H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work, and for closing of openings, repairs, and reconstructions where suitable salvaged materials do not exist, are insufficient in quantity, or where reuse is not permitted. Match existing material, type, quality, color, and finish.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.

C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 016000.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Beginning new work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.



D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize

waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.

E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. 1. Prior to construction, certify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of

sanitary sewer, storm sewer, water service piping and electrical power.

F. The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Furnish information necessary to adjust, move or relocate existing structures, utility poles, lines, services or other appurtenances located in, or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.

B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.

C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.

3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the project site or other designated location prior to commencing work of the section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.

C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date.

D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK

A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.

B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. Await instructions prior to proceeding with Work.

C. Construction Manager shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.

D. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings.

E. Locate, verify, and protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction.

F. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons.



G. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes

without prior written notice to Architect.

H. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.

I. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents. Work from lines and levels established by the property survey. Establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to properly locate each element of the Project.

J. Verify property corners, easements, building setbacks, and horizontal control dimensions with information contained in Contract Documents.

K. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement;

utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations. 4. Controlling lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical trades.

L. Periodically verify layouts by same means. Check every major element for line, level and plumb.

M. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. Make this log available for reference.

N. Record deviations from required lines and levels,and advise the Architect when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted and not corrected.

O. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare a certified survey illustrating dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work.

3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.

B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.

F. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions.

G. Advise entities engaged in construction activities, of marked lines and levels provided for their use.

3.06 ALTERATIONS

A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.



3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Keep areas in which alterations are being conducted separated from other areas that are still occupied. 1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in

Section 015000 in locations indicated on drawings.

C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage. 1. Where openings in exterior enclosure exist, provide construction to make exterior

enclosure weatherproof. 2. Insulate existing ducts or pipes that are exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures by

alterations work.

D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace

with new construction specified. 2. Remove items indicated on drawings. 3. Relocate items indicated on drawings. 4. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch,

and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish.

5. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible.

6. Cutting: a. Perform cutting for rectangular openings with carborundum saw with approved duct

arrestor. b. Drill holes for conduit and piping using core drills. c. Pilot-drill for new penetrations in structural members to determine the exact location

of, and possible interference with items such as reinforcing bar, piping, anchors, etc.

E. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to

equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access panel.

2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize

duration of outages. b. See Section 011000 for other limitations on outages and required notifications. c. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service.

3. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction.

F. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.

G. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible. 1. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not

possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect.



2. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.

3. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs in existing work, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect review and request instructions.

H. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch so that the substrate is ready for the new finish.

I. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated: 1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces

to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.

2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and refinish to match.

J. If asbestos containing materials (ACM's), Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's), or other suspected hazardous materials are encountered, cease work in affected area immediately, notify Owner, and await further instructions. Protect affected areas from damage and from possible contact by persons.

K. Clean existing systems and equipment.

L. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site; do not burn or bury.

M. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete.

N. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section.

3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.

B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements.

C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

D. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs and new work. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.

E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.

G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.



I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 078400, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

J. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous

surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other

imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish.

3.08 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.

C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury.

3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.

B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.

C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.

D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.

E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.

F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.

G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible.

3.10 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.

B. Notify Architect and owner seven days prior to start-up of each item.

C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.

D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer.

E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Construction Manager personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.



G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION

A. See Section 017900 - Demonstration and Training.

B. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion.

C. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at designated location.

D. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months.

E. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration and instruction of owner personnel.

F. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

G. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

3.12 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems: See Division 23.

3.13 FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.

B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.

C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned.

E. Clean or replace filters of operating equipment.

F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.

G. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.

H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.

3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Architect.

B. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion.



C. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been

inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review.

D. Include written Punch List of incomplete items prior to Architect's inspection.

E. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete.

F. Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection.

G. If Architect performs reinspection due to failure of Work to comply with claims of status of completion made by Contractor, Owner will compensate Architect for such additional services and will deduct the amount of such compensation from final payment to Contractor.

3.15 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.

B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer.

C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required.

D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.

E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 017800 - 1

SECTION 017800

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Project Record Documents.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data.

C. Warranties and bonds.


A. Section 00 7200 - General Conditions: Performance bond and labor and material payment bonds, warranty, and correction of work.

B. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples.

C. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.

D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.

E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: 1. Prior to Final Inspection and as a prerequisite to Final Payment, submit Record Document

drawings, including mechanical, electrical and plumbing installations, and other installations as specified in Contract Documents, to Architect for permanent Project File.

2. Documents shall be submitted at one time with transmittal letter containing date, Project title, Contractor's name and address, itemized list of documents, and signature of Contractor. The Contractor's signature acknowledges that the documents have been reviewed and that they represent a true and accurate record of the work installed.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before

start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and

operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.

C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with

Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final

Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion,

submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.

D. Keys and Keying Schedule.

E. Spare parts and maintenance materials.

F. Evidence of payment of Sub-contractors and suppliers.

G. Final lien waiver.

H. Certificate of insurance for products and completed operations.




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Field orders and other written instruction. 6. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 7. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. 8. Field test records. 9. Other records required throughout construction by Owner.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.

C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.

D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.

E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,

referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,

referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract drawings. 6. Source of Record Documents:

a. Drawings and Approved Drawing Modifications: Provide one complete full size set of blue line prints and reproducible mylars of Contract Drawings and full size blue line prints and reproducible mylars of each approved Contract Change to Contract Drawings. 1) Arrange for documents to be sent to reproduction company and pay costs of

reproduction and delivery of prints and reproducible mylars. b. Specifications, Addenda, Contract Changes, Field Orders and Written Instructions,

and Field Test Data: Provide one xerox single side copy of each document on 8-1/2" x 11" three hole paper, collated, indexed, tabbed and bound in durable three ring loose-leaf binders.

c. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Refer to Section 01300 for requirements.

d. Referenced Standards and Other Documents: Obtain, when directed, or as necessary to properly execute the work, copies of literature, standards and other data referred to but not included in the Project Manual.

7. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: a. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used

for construction. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for samples.

b. File documents and samples in accordance with Drawing Index and Specification



Table of Contents. c. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use

record documents for construction purposes. d. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by Architect and

Owner's Representative. e. Record Prints will be reviewed monthly by the Owner and Architect. This will be a

requirement for issuance of a Certificate for Payment. 8. Recording of Record Documents:

a. Remove title blocks and registration seals of Architect and Consultants in accordance with Rule 1.104 of the Rules and Regulations of the Texas Board of Architectural Examiners.

b. Label each document and each sheet of the Record Drawing Set as constructed, "Project Record Documents", in stamped or printed letters, also with company name of installing subcontractor and General Contractor, date, and name of responsible company representative.

c. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information. Do not conceal items required to be shown on Project Record Documents until recorded.

d. Utilize skilled draftspersons to make neat legible notations on Record Documents to record actual construction as follows: 1) Location of underground utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,

referenced by a elevation and dimension to visible and accessible features of structure.

2) Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced by elevation and dimension to visible and accessible features of structure.

3) Indicate field changes of dimension and detail, changes made by field order or Change Order, and details not on Contract Drawings.

4) Record actual CFM rating in each space on Mechanical Drawings. e. In Specifications and Addenda, record manufacturer, trade name, catalog number,

and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed, approved changes made by Change Order, approved substitution, or other modification, and other matters not originally specified.

f. Entries: Clearly describe change by note and by graphic line, as required. Date all entries. Call attention to entry by "cloud" around area or areas affected. In event of overlapping changes, use different color for each change.

g. Owner and Architect will review Record Set monthly. If documents are not being maintained concurrently with construction progress, Owner may withhold progress payments until documents are made current.

3.02 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. 1. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated

submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.

C. Co-execute submittals when required.

D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers.



F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Construction Manager and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal.

G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item.

H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INDIVIDUAL BRICK REPLACEMENT 042000.01 - 1

SECTION 042000.01

INDIVIDUAL BRICK REPLACEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Work includes, but is not limited to, the following items:

1. Protect all adjacent surfaces, walkways, vehicles and pedestrians. 2. Removal of defective brick masonry. 3. Cleaning and preparation for installation of bricks. 4. Installation of replacement brick. 5. Removal of debris and residue. 6. Final cleaning.

B. Related work which may be specified elsewhere:

1. Section 042000.02 - Masonry Restoration. 1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. The following definitions shall be used by the Consultant to describe the work required by this

section.

B. Broken: The actual separation of the brick unit into two or more parts or fragments with one or more parts missing. Broken brick masonry units with cracks exceeding 1/32 inch the full height of the brick unit shall be removed and replaced.

C. Spalling: The reduction of the finished surface area due to the breaking off or chipping off of the

face of the brick or stone unit. Face brick with spalling 1/8 inch or greater in depth over a portion of 20% or greater of the surface of any individual unit shall be removed and replaced with matching brick masonry as approved by the Consultant.

D. Deterioration: The result of gradual erosion or weathering, or the result of the previous

sandblasting of the brick, mortar or stone.

E. Separation: The opening up of a space between adjoining units of brick, masonry or stone, or between masonry and its mortar joint.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all special brick shapes. Submit shop drawings

showing shoring required for areas of multiple brick replacement. Indicate details of all phases of replacement and supports for the work.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each product indicated on each proposed

phase of replacement work, including recommendations for their application and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with specifications of Consultant and provisions of the Contract.

C. Replacement Procedure: Submit written program for each phase of replacement process

including protection of all surrounding materials on building and site during operations. Describe in detail methods, materials and equipment to be used in each phase of brick replacement work.

D. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes and prior to sample panel erection, samples of all



types of mortar materials, colors, brick masonry, anchors, etc. as outlined in the drawings and provisions and subsequent conditions of the General Contract.


A. Contractor Qualifications: Work shall be performed by a firm having not less than 5 years’

successful experience in comparable masonry restoration projects and employing personnel skilled in the restoration processes and operations indicated. Provide adequate references upon request of Consultant.

B. Regulatory Requirement: The Contractor shall comply with all municipal or State regulations

governing cleaning, scaffolding, and protection to adjacent properties, pedestrians, etc.

C. Sample Panels: Prepare one (1) set of a minimum of five proposed replacement facing brick units displaying the full range of color and textural variance for each brick type. If salvaged brick are being used, submit a sample of five showing cleaning techniques and condition.


A. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building where individual bricks are

being replaced, building site and surrounding building from damage resulting from individual brick replacement work. 1. Prevent damaging dust, debris, mortar and chemical cleaning solutions from coming into

contact with pedestrians, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings and other surfaces that could be damaged by such contact.

2. Dispose debris and run-off from cleaning operations by legal means and in manner which prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.

3. Erect temporary protection covers over pedestrian walkways and at points of entrance and exit for persons and vehicles which must remain in operation during the course of masonry restoration work.

B. Do not replace masonry, wash down or wet surfaces when temperature may drop below 40oF

within 24 hours. Follow cold weather procedures as set out in ANSI A41.1 when temperatures may drop below 40oF.

C. Do not use process creating dust, dirt, or chemical overspray when wind is over 15 mph.

D. Prevent mortar used in re-pointing and replacement work from staining face of surrounding

masonry and other surfaces. Remove mortar in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces.

E. Protect sills, ledges and projections from mortar drippings and remove protections upon completion of work.

1.06 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Provide other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper

installation as selected by the Contractor and approved by the Consultant.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements as outlined in drawings, specifications and provisions of the Contract matching existing masonry, mortar color, texture and compressive strength, and course of masonry. Contractor may access the exterior building elevations by the use of scaffolding. All equipment shall be supplied by the Contractor. Compliance with all OSHA standards and regulations regarding erection, maintenance and usage of equipment shall be observed.

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Match existing brick with new or salvaged units where available as approved by the Consultant and by the Owner. Provide special brick units and accessories, including units for other special ground, cut, or sawed shapes where required to complete brick replacement work as indicated on drawings and in contract specifications. Provide units with color, surface texture, and size to match existing masonry.

2.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS

A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original and unopened containers and packaging, bearing labels as to type and names of products and manufacturers.

B. Protect masonry and restoration materials during storage and construction from wetting by rain,

snow or ground water, and from staining or intermixture with earth or other types of materials.

C. Protect mortar and other materials from deterioration by moisture and temperature. Store in a dry location or in waterproof containers. Keep mortar and chemicals in containers tightly closed and away from open flames. Protect liquid components from freezing. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces to be restored are ready for work. Beginning of brick replacement operations means Contractor has accepted the conditions of the existing surfaces.

3.02 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING (AS IT APPLIES TO OTHER RELATED WORK THAT MAY BE

INDICATED)

A. Protect elements surrounding the work from damage or disfiguration.

B. Cut out existing defective brick units.

C. Clean and wash out masonry surfaces.

D. Replace defective brick units with matching brick.

E. Remove debris and residue in accordance with applicable codes, standards and regulations.

F. Re-point joints or install sealants as shown on drawings or as specified herein.



3.03 REPLACING INDIVIDUAL BRICKS

A. Contractor shall replace damaged, cracked, missing or deteriorated brick masonry with units the same size, color and surface texture as the existing brick. New replacement brick shall meet ASTM C216 or as otherwise indicated. Special shapes shall be provided as needed to maintain original construction contours.

B. Replacement Procedures:

1. Cut out old mortar surrounding defective brick units with motor-driven saws and/or specially designed multi-tooth tuckpointing chisel to prevent damage to adjacent masonry units. Contractor shall be responsible for replacement of adjacent brick units that become damaged during the brick removal process.

2. After cutting mortar which surrounds the affected units, to ease removal, the units can be broken.

3. All old mortar shall be carefully chiseled out and all dust and debris shall be swept out with a brush. If the units are located in the exterior wythe of a cavity wall, care shall be exercised not to allow debris to fall into the cavity.

4. The brick surfaces in the wall shall be dampened before new units are placed. The masonry shall have absorbed all surface moisture to ensure a good bond.

5. The appropriate surfaces of the surrounding brickwork and the replacement brick shall be buttered with mortar prior to placement. Bond pattern is to match existing wall construction; header units shall be provided where previously existed.

6. Lay-up replacement units with specified construction tolerances. 7. The excess mortar shall be removed with a trowel. The replacement brick shall be pointed

to ensure full head and bed joints. 8. When the mortar is “thumbprint” hard, the joints shall be tooled to match the original profile.

C. Cover partially completed work areas to provide a weather-tight condition when work is not in

progress. When resuming stopped work, rake back ½ unit length into previous work in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if required) and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.

D. Cure mortar by maintaining in a damp condition for 72 hours. Provide periodic mist spray

directly to mortar joints and masonry. Take care not to wash out fresh mortar. After mortar has fully hardened thoroughly, clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter using stiff nylon or bristle brushes and clean water, spray applied at low pressure. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes.

3.03 AGING OF NEW MORTAR TO BLEND IN WITH ADJACENT WORK

A. Rub in or dust mortar joints, new masonry and stone work where necessary to match as closely as possible after cleaning adjacent original work.

B. Use carbon black or other approved materials in small amounts, rubbing in well with burlap rags

or medium bristle brush.

C. After each application, dust off surplus and wash down with medium pressure house. Allow to dry thoroughly before proceeding with succeeding applications.

D. Continue process until acceptance is obtained.

3.04 FINAL CLEANING

A. Promptly as work proceeds and upon completion, remove excess mortar, smears and droppings.



B. Clean adjacent and adjoining surface of marks arising out of execution of work of this Section.

C. Sweep up and remove daily, cleaning compounds and mixtures, dirt, debris and rubbish.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS MASONRY RESTORATION 042000.02 - 1

SECTION 042000.02

MASONRY RESTORATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Cleaning Work at masonry restoration areas shall be washing and cleaning as required to

properly conduct specified restoration procedures.

B. Replace broken brick and repair brick, tuck point mortar joints, and other masonry as required to achieve a watertight facility. Water tightness shall be achieved and verified by the Contractor prior to application of dampproofing products.

C. Cleaning work at masonry restoration areas shall be washing and cleaning as requited to properly

conduct specified restoration procedures.

D. Repairing damaged masonry.

E. Replacement of brick.

F. Repointing mortar joints.

G. Brick replacement and repointing of mortar joints. H. Removal of extraneous items such as abandoned anchorage services, bracket flag supports and

other items mounted to the face of the building which are abandoned or no longer required

I. Remove required courses of brick from below grade brick ledge to a height 16” above finish floor and install flashing and weep systems.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Section 042000.01 - Individual Brick Replacement.


A. Installation Qualifications: Work shall be performed by a firm having not less than 5 years successful

experience in comparable masonry restoration projects and employing personnel skilled in the restoration processes and operations indicated.

B. Qualifications:

1. Materials shall be applied by a contractor previously approved and invited to bid as a prime contractor. All contractors shall be pre-approved prior to bidding.

C. Mortar joints shall be deemed defective and shall be replaced if they are judged by the Consultant to

be loose, cracked, deteriorated, mis-colored, leaking or otherwise poorly placed. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each product indicated or required, including

recommendations for their application and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with requirements.

PROJ. NO.: DE-11-035-RB-008 TEXAS WOMAN'S UNIVERSITY FS2008-11-000 LIBRARY WATER INFILTRATION MITIGATION 06/11/16


B. Each new exposed masonry material to be used for replacing existing materials. C. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all products proposed for use. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers and packaging, bearing

labels as to type and names of products and manufacturers. B. Carefully handle masonry units and accessories. Handle to prevent chipping and breakage. C. Deliver other materials to site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers and packaging,

bearing labels as to type and names of products and manufacturers. D. Protect masonry and related materials during storage and construction from wetting by rain, snow or

ground water, and from staining or intermixture with earth or other types of materials. E. Protect grout, mortar, and other materials from deterioration by moisture and temperature. Store in a

dry location or in waterproof containers. Keep containers tightly closed and away from open flames. Protect liquid components from freezing. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage.


A. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building whose masonry or other surfaces

are being restored, building site, and surrounding buildings from injury resulting from masonry work. B. Prevent chemical solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians, motor vehicles, landscaping,

buildings and other surfaces which could be injured by such contact. C. Do not clean masonry or other surfaces during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions

to unprotected surfaces.

D. Dispose of run-off from cleaning operations by legal means and in manner which prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.

E. Erect temporary protection covers over pedestrians walkways and at points of entrance and exit for

persons and vehicles which shall remain in operation during course of masonry restoration work. F. Work masonry surfaces only when air temperatures are 40oF (4oC) and above and will remain so until

masonry has dried out, but for not less than seven (7) days after completion. G. Do not repoint mortar joints or repair masonry unless air temperatures are between 40o (4oC) and

80 oF (27 oC) and will remain so far at least 48 hours after completion of Work.

H. Prevent grout or mortar used in repointing and repair from staining face of surrounding masonry and other surfaces. Remove immediately grout and mortar in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces.

I. Protect sills, ledges and projections from mortar droppings.

1.07 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING

A. Perform masonry restoration work in the following sequence.



1. Repair existing masonry including replacing existing broken masonry with new masonry materials.

2. Rake out existing mortar from joints required to be repointed and clean to receive new mortar. 3. Repoint existing mortar joints of masonry units that are cracked or otherwise not watertight.

4. Clean masonry and surrounding surfaces affected by restoration procedures. Clean excess mortar from masonry surfaces.

1.08 DEFINITIONS

A. Defective: Any mortar joint that is loose, porous, crumbled, cracked, severely weathered (deeper than

1/8 inch behind the masonry surface), not bonded to adjacent masonry units or are a potential source of leakage. Cracked joints which have been previously caulked shall be deemed “defective”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY MATERIALS A. Face Brick and Accessories: Provide face brick and accessories where required to complete

masonry restoration work. 1. Provide units with color, surface texture and size to match existing brick and with physical

properties not less than those determined from preconstruction testing, or selected existing units. Units to be approved by Owner and Consultant.

2. Provide units with color, surface texture, and physical properties to match existing in-place brick. 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. For masonry indicated, provide nonstaining white cement complying with staining requirement of

ASTM C 91 for not more than 0.03% water soluble alkali. 2. Approved manufacturers:

a. Northwestern States Portland Cement by Holnam Cement Company. b. Leigh Cement Company c. Huron Cement by Dundee Cement Company d. Equal or equivalent manufacturer if approved by the Consultant.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Aggregate For Mortar: ASTM C 144, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Lime: Hydrated lime, ASTM C207, Type “S”. 2. Approved manufacturer is Western Lime. 3. Equal or equivalent manufacturer if approved by Consultant.

D. Colored Mortar Aggregate: Natural or manufactured hand selected to produce mortar color to match

existing. 1. For pointing mortar provide sand with rounded edges. 2. Match appearance of existing mortar as closely as possible. E. Colored Mortar Pigment: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for

use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. F. Water: Clean, free of oils, acids, alkalis and organic matter. G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.



2.03 MORTAR MIXES A. General: 1. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious and aggregate material in a dry condition by

volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel, use known measures. Mix materials in a clean mechanical batch mixer.

2. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix which shall retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 1-to-2 hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar of desired consistency is reached. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material.

3. Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by use of selected ingredients. Do not adjust proportions without Consultant’s approval.

4. Color Pigmented Mortar: Where colored mortar pigments are indicated do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1-to-10, by weight.

5. Do not use admixtures of any kind in mortar, unless otherwise indicated or approved in writing by Consultant.

B. Mortar Proportions: 1. Pointing Mortar for Brick: Unless analysis of existing mortar shows a different mix then the

following shall apply, One (1) part white Portland cement, 2 parts lime, and 6 parts colored mortar aggregate.

a. Add colored mortar pigment to produce mortar colors required. b. Adjust proportions of pointing mortar as required by site conditions as coordinated with and

approved by Owner and Consultant.

C. Weeps: Provide aluminum weep cell/vent: one-piece L-shaped unit made to fit in a vertical mortar joint; fabricated from sheet aluminum and consisting of a vertical channel with louvers stamped in web and a flat horizontal. DA 1006 Cell Vents by Dur-O-Wal or approved equal or equivalent manufacturer if approved by Consultant.


A. Provide other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation as selected by the Contractor and approved by the Consultant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with recommendations of mortar manufacturers and masonry trade organizations

for protecting building surfaces and installation procedures. B. Protect glass, unpainted metal trim and other materials from contact with acidic chemical cleaners

and mortar by covering with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. Apply masking agent to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces.

C. Protect unpainted metal from contact with alkali chemical cleaners by covering them either with liquid

strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 3.02 MASONRY REMOVAL AND REBUILDING A. Masonry Removal: 1. Carefully remove by hand at locations of the building exterior, brick which is broken, cracked,



damaged, spalled or deteriorated. Cut out full units from joint to joint and in manner to permit replacement with full size units.

2. Support and protect masonry indicated to remain which surrounds removal area. Remove quantity of bricks that can be supported for incorporation of waterproof membranes.

3. Clean remaining brick at edges of removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose debris in preparation for rebuilding.

B. Masonry Rebuilding: 1. Install new brick to replace and match size and coursing of removed brick. Fit replacement units

into bonding and coursing pattern of existing. If cutting is required use motor driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp unchipped edges.

2. Lay replacement brick with completely filled bed, head and collar joints. Butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Wet clay brick which have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 grams per 30 sq. in. per minute. Use wetting methods which ensure that units are nearly saturated but surface dry when laid. Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing.

3. Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing brickwork. 4. Repoint new mortar joints in repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing

masonry, except rake out joints before mortar sets. 3.03 REPOINTING EXISTING MASONRY A. Joint Raking: 1. Provide joint raking at areas where building movement has led to stair-step cracks in brick and

mortar joints. Remove and replace cracked or damaged brick. 2. Cut out old mortar by hand with chisel and mallet or approved mechanical method. 3. Power operated rotary hand saws and grinders will be permitted on review by Consultant and

Project Manager based on submission by Contractor of a satisfactory quality control program and demonstrated ability of operators to use tools without damage to masonry. Quality control program shall include provisions for supervising performance and preventing damage due to worker fatigue.

4. Rake out mortar from joints to depths equal to 2-1/2 times their widths but not less than 1" nor less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar.

5. Remove Mortar from masonry surfaces within rake-out joints to provide reveals with square backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris.

6. Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace masonry units which become damaged.

7. At areas where stair-step cracking exists, clean, prime, and install backer rod and polyurethane sealant. Face of sealant shall be recessed sufficiently to allow placement of new mortar over sealant (approximately 1/2").

8. Place new mortar of approximately 3/8" thickness over installed sealant to match appearance of surrounding masonry.

B. Tuckpointing: 1. At cracked, loose, or questionable mortar joints, remove existing mortar to a depth of twice the

width of the mortar joint (approximately 3/4" based on 3/8" joints). 2. Rinse masonry joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time application of

rinsing so that at time of pointing, excess water has evaporated or run off, and joint surfaces are dry and able to receive mortar application.

3. Apply first layer of pointing mortar to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8" until a uniform depth is formed. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint-hard before applying next layer.

4. After joints have been filled to a uniform depth, place remaining pointing mortar in three (3) layers with each of first and second layers filling approximately 2/5 of joint depth and third layer the remaining l/5. Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying



next layer. Where existing bricks have rounded edges, recess final layer slightly from face. Take care not to spread mortar over edges onto exposed masonry surfaces, or to feather edge mortar.

5. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints, unless otherwise indicated or approved. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing.

6. Cure mortar by maintaining in a damp condition for not less than 72 hours. 7. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry allow mortar to harden not less than

30 days before beginning cleaning work. 8. Where mortar joints have step cracked due to building movement cut mortar and install sealant as

addressed above, allow sealant to cure, finish off tuckpointing with mortar, and tool to match surrounding.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1

SECTION 054000

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Formed steel stud exterior wall framing.


A. Division 1: Administrative, procedural and temporary work requirements.

C. Section 072100 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation within framing members.

D. Section 079005 - Joint Sealers.

E. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.


A. AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971)

B. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005.

C. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007.

D. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2007a.

E. ASTM C 955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases; 2007.

F. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2006 and Errata.

G. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).

H. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate with work of other sections that is to be installed in or adjacent to the metal framing system, including but not limited to structural anchors, cladding anchors, utilities, insulation, and firestopping.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria, limitations.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on factory-made framing connectors, showing compliance with requirements.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products



specified in this section, and with minimum three years of documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. Dietrich Metal Framing: www.dietrichindustries.com. 2. Marino\Ware: www.marinoware.com. 3. The Steel Network, Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FRAMING SYSTEM

A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.

2.04 FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Studs and Track: ASTM C 955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Gauge: Match existing. 2. Stud Depth: Match existing. 3. Stud Spacing: Match existing. 4. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M G90/Z275 coating. 5. Provide components fabricated from ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation SS steel.

2.05 WALL SHEATHING

A. Wall Sheathing: See Section 092116.

2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components.

B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Sheet Steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components.

C. Movement Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate movement using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, while maintaining structural performance of framing.

D. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Wall Sheathing: See Section 092116.

2.07 FASTENERS

A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Anchorage Devices: Types recommended by manufacturer for project conditions.

C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF STUDS A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.



B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks.

C. Place studs at 16 inches on center unless noted otherwise; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using welding, bolting, screwing, or other methods indicated.

D. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Install double studs at wall openings, door and window jambs.

E. Install load bearing studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs is not permitted.

F. Install load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design requirements.

G. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection.

H. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing.

I. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load bearing framing.

J. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls.

K. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation.

L. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.

M. Welding: AWS D1.1: 1. Use low amperage welding equipment and small diameter rods to prevent blow holes. 2. Provide 1/8 inch fillet welds continuous across contact surfaces unless noted otherwise. 3. Puddle welds: 3/4 inch diameter. 4. Provide welding washers when welds are made to material 3/16 inch or less in thickness.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THERMAL INSULATION Addendum No. 1 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100

THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Board insulation in exterior wall construction.

B. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall.

C. Sound insulation in partitions and above ceilings.


A. Division 1: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements.


A. ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2007.

B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2008.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 1 for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations.

C. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of insulation, 6 x 6 inch in size, illustrating product characteristics.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation.

1.06 SEQUENCING

A. Sequence work to ensure fireproofing and firestop materials are in place before beginning work of this section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation in Metal Framing: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder.

2.02 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Thickness: As scheduled. 2. Density: 1 pcf (16 kg/m3) minimum. 3. Acceptable Products:

a. Sound Attenuation Batts by Owens Corning. b. Sound Control Batts by CertainTeed. c. Sound Control Batts by Johns Manville.

4. Locations: Sound insulation above ceilings.


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THERMAL INSULATION Addendum No. 1 072100 - 2

A. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C 665; friction fit. 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. 4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero. 5. Thermal Resistance: Minimum R of 13. 6. Thickness: Match existing. 7. Facing: Unfaced.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation.

B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of irregularities or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond.

3.02 BATT INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.

C. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 1

SECTION 072500

WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Air and Water Barriers: Materials to stop passage of air and water through exterior walls and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls.



1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water-resistive barriers, air barriers, vapor retarders, or water-resistive barriers.

B. Air Barrier: Air-tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vapor permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.


A. ASTM D 1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2001.

B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2008.

C. ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005.

D. ASTM E 2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2003.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings of special joint conditions.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before, during and after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES

A. Air Barrier: 1. On outside surface of sheathing of exterior walls use air barrier coating.

2.02 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER-RESISTIVE)

A. Air Barrier Coating: Cold-fluid-applied, vapor permeable, elastomeric waterproofing membrane. 1. Material: Water-based acrylic or polymer-modified bitumen, with VOC content of zero. 2. Adhesion to Paper and Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Sufficient to ensure failure due to



delamination of sheathing. 3. Dry Film Thickness: 10 mils (0.010 inch), minimum. 4. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per square foot, maximum, when tested in accordance

with ASTM E 2178. 5. Water Vapor Permeance: 5 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E96/E 96M. 6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed

index of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 7. Products:

a. Grace Construction Products; Perm-A-Barrier VP: www.na.graceconstruction.com. b. Henry Company; Air-Bloc 31: www.henry.com. c. PROSOCO; R-Guard Spray Wrap: www.prosoco.com. d. Tremco Global Sealants; ExoAir 220R: www.tremcosealants.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 SEALANTS

A. Sealant: As recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

B. Sealant Backers: As specified in Section 079005.

C. Primers, Cleaners, and Other Sealant Materials: As recommended by sealant manufacturer, appropriate to application, and compatible with adjacent materials.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Self-Adhesive Sheet Flashing: ASTM D 1970.

B. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by material manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with proper installation.

B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Air Barriers: Install continuous air-tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.

C. Coatings: 1. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by coating manufacturer; fill and tape joints in

substrate and between dissimilar materials. 2. Sprayed Coating: Install to thickness recommended by manufacturer. 3. Use self-adhesive sheet flashing to seal to adjacent construction and to bridge joints.

D. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers: 1. Install self-adhesive flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at

least 5 inches onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges.

2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with



self-adhesive flashing at least 4 inches wide; do not seal sill flange. 3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides of

opening framing, using self-adhesive flashing at least 9 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing.

4. At head of openings, install self-adhesive flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing.

5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing, using joint sealant over backer rod.

6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form self-adhesive flashing around penetrating item and seal to weather barrier surface.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADHERED MEMBRANE MASONRY FLASHING 076500 - 1

SECTION 076500

ADHERED MEMBRANE MASONRY FLASHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Specifications, apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Contractor shall provide self-adhered rubberized asphalt membrane with protective facer meeting

the provisions of the Contract, the Specifications and the Drawings. The extent of work is indicated in the Drawings, unless specified herein.

B. The Contractor shall install adhered membrane masonry flashing in the following areas:

1. Wall bases at foundation level. 2. Through-wall flashings at other locations. 3. End dam flashings. 4. Other areas as indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Consultant.

C. Related work which may be specified elsewhere:

1. Section 042000.01 - Individual Brick Replacement. 2. Section 042000.02 - Masonry Restoration. 3. Section 079005.01 - Joint Sealers. 4. Section 079005.02 - Recaulking Movement Joints.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Installation Procedure: Submit written program for each phase of flashing installation including

protection of all surrounding materials on building and site during operations. Describe in detail materials, methods and equipment to be used for each phase of flashing work.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data. Materials and installation instructions for

manufactured items shall be included. Submit tests and compliance certification shall have been performed and presented by an independent testing laboratory and be less than one year old from the start date.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings and data showing areas of flashing to be installed and

methods of installation.

D. Samples: Provide samples of flashing material 12 square inches (minimum). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor shall use skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the

necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work.

B. Contractor’s Qualifications: Contractors performing this work shall have installed specified

materials on past projects of a similar size and construction for a minimum period of five (5) years.



1.05 DELIVERY

A. Flashing materials shall be delivered in the original, unopened manufacturer’s containers with all labeling information fully visible.

B. On-site storage of unopened cartons shall be such that the material is kept dry and is not stored

at temperatures in excess of 100oF. Pallets of cartons shall not be double stacked for on-site storage.


A. Install flashings as instructed by the manufacturer and approved by the Consultant. Surfaces

shall be clean, smooth and free of defects which might affect installation of the flashing.

B. Conduct all work under temperature and climatic conditions as recommended by the manufacturer and standard practice.

1.07 OWNER FURNISHES

A. The Owner shall supply electrical power without cost to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be

responsible for proper hook-up and maintenance of temporary electrical connections. The Contractor shall locate sufficient electrical circuits, protected by circuit breakers, to be certain that system overload shall not occur by Contractor’s equipment usage. The Contractor shall use only electrical equipment that is fused or protected by circuit breakers from Owner’s electrical system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Provide labor, equipment, materials and installation as indicated in Contract and approved by the Consultant. Follow all manufacturer’s instructions for installation. Provide the following materials as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Consultant for each type of flashing to be installed.

B. Through-Wall Flashing:

1. Self adhesive rubberized asphalt sheet flashing consisting of 32-mil thick pliable and highly adhesive rubberized asphalt compound bonded completely and integrally to 8-mil thick, high density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of 40 mils. Acceptable product: Perm-A-Barrier by W. R. Grace & Co., or approved equal.

2. Mastic: Rubberized, asphalt-based mastic approved by flashing manufacturer for use with flashing material.

3. Surface Conditioner: Perm-A-Barrier Surface Conditioner by W. R. Grace & Co., or equal, approved by flashing manufacturer for use with flashing material.

C. Through-Wall Flashing Accessories:

1. Metal drip edge: Stainless steel, 26 ga. hemmed edges with down turned drip at outside edge and upturned dam at inside edge by Dur-O-Wal, Arlington Heights, Illinois, or approved equal.

2. High temperature asphaltic mastic. 3. Term Bar: 1” pre-punched (6”o.c.) aluminum termination bar.

D. Weeps: Provide aluminum weep cell/vent: one-piece L-shaped unit made to fit in a vertical mortar

joint; fabricated from sheet aluminum and consisting of a vertical channel with louvers stamped in web and a flat horizontal. DA 1006 Cell Vents by Dur-O-Wal or approved equal or equivalent



manufacturer if approved by Consultant. E. Colored Mortar Aggregate: Natural or manufactured hand selected to produce mortar color to

match existing. 1. For pointing mortar provide sand with rounded edges. 2. Match appearance of existing mortar as closely as possible. F. Colored Mortar Pigment: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded

for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars.

G. Fasteners: Prior to installation, Consultant’s approval of manufacturer shall be obtained for all

fasteners, screws, rivets and materials used. 1. Fasteners for attaching metal membrane termination bar to back up masonry shall be

minimum 3/16 inch x 1 inch (minimum) Tapcon, Congrip. 2. Nylon drive in anchor pins with rust-resistant nails. 3. Fastener spacing shall be 12-inch maximum for termination bar.

H. Accessories:

1. Seam tape - 2 inch or 3 inch seam sealing tape of the same thickness and manufacturer as membrane.

2. Seam Sealant - butyl sealant or as specified herein. 3. Provide other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper

installation as selected by the Contractor and approved by the Consultant. 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS



A. Verify that surfaces to receive flashing are ready for work. Surfaces to which adhered membrane masonry flashing is to be applied shall be smooth, sound, clean, dry and free from defects that might affect the application. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Obtain approval from Consultant prior to start of work. Beginning of work means the Contractor has accepted the conditions of the existing surfaces.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install flashing and components in strict accordance with arrangements shown on the

drawings. 2. Masonry shall be smooth and free of projections and debris. 3 Install all flashing according to manufacturer’s instructions; plumb, level and in-line securely

anchored and properly related to other parts of the work.

B. Installation Methods: 1. To install continuous flashing in existing walls, the existing masonry must be removed in

sections to maintain support. Remove alternate sections of masonry in 5 to 10 ft. (1.5 to 3m).

2. Continuity: Flashing pieces shall be lapped at least 4 inches (100 mm) and the laps sealed with mastic or an adhesive compatible with the flashing material.



3. Field Plies for Foundation: Extend waterproofing ply flashing from a level position ledge approximately 4” below lowest brick of foundation, extend over and through the brick ledge, turn up foundation and terminate.

4. Field Plies for Through Wall Flashing: Extend flashing from a line ½” in from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry through the outer wythe, turned up the sheathing to the level 12” above finish floor unless noted otherwise.

5. Window Sill Flashing Installation: Install sill flashing where shown on the drawings.

a. Place through-wall flashing on front edge of sill, extend under aluminum fabrication to furthest point. Extend ends of sill flashing beyond the jamb line on both sides and turn them up at least 1 inch into the wall. Install flashing across full width of opening, form a waterblocking pan at both ends by folding the ends of the membrane up and adhering the membrane to itself in an appropriate manner.

b. Provide adequate weep system at reinstalled masonry veneer to allow moisture penetration escape.

c. Provide additional flashing material and detail work as specified by the Consultant. 6. End Dams: Where flashing is not continuous, the ends of the flashing shall be extended

beyond the jamb lines on both sides and shall be turned up into the head joint several inches at each end to form a dam.

7. Flashing Around Corners: Flashing shall be continuous around corners. Pieces of flashing may need to be cut, in which case the flashing shall be lapped and sealed to conform to the shape of the structure.

8. Flashing seams must be thoroughly bonded in a manner which prevents water penetration. Provide surface primer as recommended by the manufacturer.

9. Top and vertical edges of waterproof membrane shall be secured with a termination bar and fasteners and be covered with approved sealant.

3.03 FINAL CLEANING

A. At the conclusion of the work, remove all equipment used, clean up debris, refuse and surplus material and remove from work site.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS JOINT SEALERS 079005.01 - 1

SECTION 079005.01

JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Cleaning and preparation of joint surfaces.

B. Sealant and backing materials. C. Compressible foam tape. D. Sealing of window units at perimeter, window frame to masonry, window air conditioning frame to

masonry and vents to masonry. E Installation of sealant in expansion/control joints. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to properly execute the work

and, as necessary, to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of the sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification. When a conflict exits

with these specifications, the more restrictive document shall govern. A. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. B. Sealants: The Professional’s Guide, Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute. C. ASTM C 794, Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. D. ASTM C 920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

E. ASTM C 1135, Standard Test method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Properties of Structural Sealants.

1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES

A. Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and

airtight continuous seals. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Waterproofing Contractor: This work must be performed by a firm having not less than five (5) years

successful experience in comparable roof replacement project and must employ personnel skilled in the operations indicated. They also must be authorized by the specified manufacturer.

B. Verification: Prior to application of specified materials, contractor shall have manufacturer of each

respective waterproofing system inspect existing conditions to which his material is to be applied. Manufacturer shall then accept, modify or reject written specifications/ conditions of this project in writing to Consultant. Costs, if incurred for this service or field services, shall be paid for by Contractor and included in the individual bids.

C. Contractor must be found sufficiently experienced and financially sound to the satisfaction of the



Owner, Consultant.

D. Contractor must be acceptable to the manufacturers of sealants, and other waterproofing product manufacturers for issuance of manufacturers' labor and materials warranties for the specified terms and conditions.

E. The Contractor must assign a full-time site superintendent (foreman) to the project who is acceptable

to the Owner, Consultant. This site superintendent (foreman) must have a minimum of three-years experience in similar work and must have been in the employment of this Contractor for at least one year.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Site superintendent's (foreman) qualifications.

B. Product Data: Submit five (5) copies of manufacturer's technical data for each joint sealer product

required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of strips of

actual products showing full range of colors for each product exposed to view. D. Certificates: Submit certificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting that their products

comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about

manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature

change, contaminants, or other causes. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following

conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint

sealer manufacturers. 2. When joint substrate are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers when joint widths are less

than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated. 1.08 WARRANTY

A. Contractor will provide Owner a written warranty against leakage and defects in workmanship or

materials for a period of five (5) years from the date of final completion. B. Materials Manufacturers Warranty: Furnish a ten (10) year waterproofing material and labor

warranty agreeing to replace any or all defective materials, including leakage of water, abnormal aging or deterioration of respective materials, and other failures of the materials to perform as required.

C. Failure of materials or workmanship shall include, but not limited to: 1. Water penetration into the building.



2. Air infiltration into the building. 3. Adhesive or cohesive failure of sealants. 4. Staining of discoloration of installed materials or adjacent materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with single source materials requirements,

manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, the following: 1. Silicone Sealants:

a. Dow Corning. b. Dow 795. c. Primer recommended by manufacturer.

2. Backer Rod: Soft Rod. 2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with

one another and with joint substrate under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by testing and field experience as supplied by one manufacturer.

B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealer indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by

Owner and Consultant. 2.03 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Provide other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation as selected by Contractor subject to approval of the Project Manager.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Examine joints for defects that would adversely affect quality of installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Preparation of joints.

1. Mechanically grind or scrape joint to a sound, clean surface. Take care to not damage finished surfaces to remain. Verify cleaning procedures with sealant manufacturer's representative for additional requirements.

2. Remove dust and debris by blowing clean with high pressure air. 3. Wipe joint surfaces clean with solvent or cleaner recommended by sealant manufacturer using

clean cloths and eliminate any residue. 4. Prime joints to receive sealant with primer, prior to installation of new backer-rod.

a. Do not thin primer. b. Apply at approximate rate of 35-40 square feet per pint or approximately 450 linear feet per

pint. c. Allow primer to dry tack feel before applying sealant (approximately 30 minutes) d. Sealant must be installed the same day as primer. e. Failure to prime joints prior to installing sealant is unacceptable and cause for rework.

3.03 JOINT SIZES

A. Sealant: Depth as recommended by sealant manufacturer or ½".



B. Depth of joint to be approximately ½ the width of joint opening. C. All joints less than proper depth will be rejected, removed, and replaced. D. No sealant joint thickness of less than 1/4" depth will be accepted regardless of joint width. E. No sealant joint thickness of more than ½" depth will be accepted regardless of joint width. 3.04 APPLICATION

A. General: 1. Joint Backing: Install backer-rod. Maintain proper joint depth ratio at ½ the width of the joint

with a maximum depth of ½" and a minimum of 1/4". a. Do not apply primer to backer-rod or bond-breaker tape.

2. Sealant: a. Apply sealant to joints using pressure gun with nozzle sized for joint width. b. Apply sealant to joints following manufacturer's instructions for specific type sealant.

c. All sealant joints shall be tooled and acceptable to Consultant. B. Joint Backing: 1. Restrict depth of joints with backer rod where required to achieve proper joint depth. 2. Select type backer-rod recommended by sealant manufacturer for each specific type joint. 3. Size backer rod to allow for twenty-five per cent (25%) minimum compression of backer rod when

installed. Smaller diameter backer rods twisted together in lieu of larger proper sized rod will not be accepted.

4. Install backer rod as a continuous element from one end of exposed joint to other end. 5. Use push gauge to install backer rod to proper position to insure proper depth of sealant. 6. Where installation of backer rod is not feasible due to insufficient clearance, or required to

prevent three sided adhesion, apply bond breaker tape or quarter round prior to application of sealant.

7. Three sided adhesion is not permitted and will be cause for rejection of work. C. Bond Breaker Tape: 1. Install bond breaker tape in areas which will not accept backer rod where required and

recommended by sealant manufacturer to prevent three sided adhesion. Locations for use of bond breaker tape must be approved by manufacturer's representative and Consultant.

2. Install into joint substrate in such a manner as to not contaminate adhesion zone or joint wall facings, or the bond breaker tape.

3. Place release strips in disposal bag. D. Sealant: 1. Verify that temperature and moisture conditions are within manufacturer acceptable limits. 2. Using fresh sealant and clean equipment, fill joint with sealant as to not leave entrapped air, but

without changing the depth of the joint backer materials and in sufficient amounts that the tooled joint will have proper depth and profile and will terminate against the joint substrates facing in a concave profile.

3. Provide uniform cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths and configuration which allow optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling: 1. Tool joints to required configuration in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Completed sealant application shall resemble an extruded product. 3. Use tools of proper widths to coordinate with joint widths at project site. 4. Tooling Non-Sag Sealants: a. Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants



to a smooth, uniform bead of required configuration. b. Eliminate air pockets and ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. c. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. d. Do not use tooling tools or procedures which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or affect

sealant curing/adhesion. Use procedures approved by sealant manufacturer. e. Protect fresh sealant from impact and dust until surface sets. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform adhesion tests in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C1193, Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand-Pull Tab. 1. Perform five (5) tests for first 1,000 linear feet of applied silicone and one (1) test for each 1,000

feet of sealant thereafter or perform one (1) test per floor per building elevation minimum. 2. For sealants applied between dissimilar materials, test both sides of the joint.

B. Sealants failing adhesion test shall be removed, substrates cleaned, sealants re-installed, and

re-testing performed.

C. Follow all requirements and maintain test log for structural/weatherseal applications and submit report to the Consultant indicating tests, locations, dates, results, and remedial actions

3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect all work from contaminating substances and damage resulting from other construction

operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion.

3.07 CLEANING A. Remove excess sealant from adjacent surfaces immediately after contact with solvent cleaners. B. Remove all debris and containers from job site.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RECAULKING MOVEMENT JOINTS 079005.02 - 1

SECTION 079005.02

RECAULKING MOVEMENT JOINTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

The extent of the work shall be recaulking existing control joints as shown on the Drawings or specified herein. A. Remove existing caulking and mortar the full depth of the outer wythe of brick masonry. Install

backer rod and fresh sealant in the following joints: 1. Newly cut expansion joints. 2. Other locations noted on the drawings.

B. Related work which may be specified elsewhere:

1. Section 042000.02 - Masonry Restoration. 2. Section 079005.01 - Joint Sealers.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Color Samples: Submit actual samples of color range of sealant material for Consultant’s

approval, or sample of custom colors available for Consultant’s selection.

B. Manufacturer’s Recommendations: Submit technical data including performance requirements, surface preparation and installation instructions and recommendations to the Consultant for approval of materials used.


A. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. Substitute materials must meet Consultant’s approval prior to use.

B. Certificates: Submit for Consultant’s approval, certificates from manufacturers of joint seals

attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.

C. Follow all manufacturer’s and applicable codes, regulations and standards for installation and

final clean-up of products used for joint sealing.

D. Repairs shall be performed by Contractor with no less than 5 year’s successful experience in application of sealants and caulking of type required similar to those specified in this project and which is acceptable to the Consultant.


A. Adequate ventilation must be provided to prevent accumulation of hazardous fumes during application of solvent-based components in enclosed spaces, and maintain ventilation until coatings have thoroughly cured. Applicable codes, standards and regulations ensuring safety and protection of persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, and building site shall be enforced.

B. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of caulking under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint caulking manufacturers.



2. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, snow, condensation or other causes.

C. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers when joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated. Contact the Consultant for further directives.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Deliver materials to project site in original, unopened containers or bundles with labels informing

about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements and are undamaged.

Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures and in accordance with manufacturer’s directions and warranty guidelines.

1.05 OWNER FURNISHES

A. The Owner shall supply the Contractor with a point of water and supply for his hook-up. The Owner

shall supply water and electrical power without cost to the Contractor. The Contractor shall locate sufficient electrical circuits, protected by circuit breakers, to be certain that system overload shall not occur by Contractor’s equipment usage. The Contractor shall use only electrical equipment that is fused or protected by circuit breakers from Owner’s electrical system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products which are recommended by the manufacturer to be fully compatible with indicated substrates. All products, requested or suggested as alternate by the Contractor, must be approved by the Consultant and be in compliance with the Drawings and general provisions of the contract.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Provide labor, equipment, materials and installation as indicated in Contract and approved by the Consultant. Follow all manufacturer’s instructions for installation. Provide the following materials as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Consultant for each type of flashing to be installed.

B. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with single source materials requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, the following: 1. Silicone Sealants:

a. Dow Corning. b. Dow 795 with sand finish. c. Primer recommended by manufacturer.

2. Backer Rod: Soft Rod. 3. No alternates to above will be considered.

C. Primer: Where required, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Always prime surfaces.

D. Caulking Back-Up: Round bars that are 25% larger than open joint.






A. Require installer to inspect joints indicated to receive caulking for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting caulking performance. Obtain installer’s written report listing any conditions detrimental to performance of caulking work. Contractor shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing caulking to comply with recommendations and warranty of caulking manufacturers and the following requirements: 1. At locations indicated, saw cut new expansion joints through the full thickness of the outer wythe

of brick masonry into the air cavity behind the outer wythe. Layout locations of new expansion joints to form straight visual lines. Do not cut through existing structural membranes or steel shelf angles or lintels, window or door frames. Provide a wall-mounted metal track assembly or straight edge to align cutting saw. Only diamond bladed wall sawing equipment shall be used to facilitate the new expansion joint cutting. Finished expansion joint must allow for not less than 1/2 inch clear expansion space. Where the existing brick masonry is currently stressed and saw cutting a new expansion joint relieves the stress by closing, it is the responsibility of the contractor to recut the expansions joint to produce the required 1/2" minimum clearance.

2. Remove existing sealant from control and expansion joints utilizing hand tools. Cut away existing sealant with utility razor knives or other suitable hand tools. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of caulking, including dust, paints (except for permanent protective coatings tested and approved for caulking adhesion and compatibility by manufacturer), oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellants, water, surface dirt, frost, and any other materials noted by Consultant and Contractor.

3. Clean concrete, masonry stone and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by methods indicated

by the specifications, Drawings and by the Consultant to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with caulking. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

B. Joint Priming: Prime all joint substrates recommended by caulking manufacturer based on

preconstruction joint sealer-substrate tests unless directed otherwise by Consultant. Apply primer to comply with caulking manufacturer’s recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Use masking tape or approved protective coating where required to prevent contact of caulking with

adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove caulking smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and size joints in accordance with manufacturer’s and Consultant’s instructions. Remove any loose materials and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with caulking materials.



C. Examine joint dimensions and size backer rods, bond breaking tape and sealant materials to achieve

required width/depth ratios.

D. Use proper sized joint filler to achieve required sealant joint depths, to allow caulking to bond properly.

E. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces to remove excess alkalinity, unless caulking manufacturer’s

printed instructions indicate that alkalinity does not interfere with bond and performance. Protect any adjacent materials from etching action.

3.04 CAULKING OPERATIONS

A. Prior to performance of caulking, a sample of caulking color and application must be provided for acceptance by the Consultant. Work shall proceed only after Consultant’s approval of test application.

B. Comply with sealant manufacturer’s printed instructions, except where more stringent requirements

are specified herein.

C. Installed backings are to comply with, but are not limited to, the following requirements: 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of caulking during application and at

position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed caulking relative to joint widths which allow optimum caulking movement capability.

2. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. 3. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint fillers.

4. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace

with dry material. 5. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint fillers, compression seals or back of joints

where required to prevent third-side adhesion of sealant to back of joint.

D. Install caulking by proven techniques that result in caulking directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Non-sag Caulking: Immediately after caulking application and prior to time skinning or

curing begins, tool caulking to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess material from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor caulking or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by manufacturer. Concave joint configuration as required by the Drawings and approval of the Consultant.

F. Employ only proven installation techniques which shall ensure that caulking shall be deposited in

uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets.

G. Fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint shall not trap moisture and dirt.

H. For joints subject to traffic and abrasion, fill joints to a depth equal to 75% of joint width, but not more

than 3/4" deep or less than 3/8" deep.

I. For normal joints sealed with sealants and not subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of



joint width, but not more than ½" deep or less than 1/4" deep.

J. Where necessary, use masking tape to avoid overflow onto adjoining surfaces or migration into the voids of rough textured surfaces.

K. Remove excess and spillage of compounds promptly as the work progresses. Clean the adjoining

surfaces to eliminate evidence of spillage.

L. Cure caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations and warranty to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.

M Broadcast loose sand that matches color of surrounding mortar onto sealant during curing process. 3.05 PROTECTION AND FINAL CLEANING

A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to produce installations with repair areas indistinguishable from original work.

B. Clean off excess caulking or smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with

cleaning materials approved by manufacturer and Consultant.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WET-SEALING OF WINDOW FRAMES 088000.01 - 1

SECTION 088000.01

WET-SEALING OF WINDOW FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Scrape and clean metal to metal joints in the window system. Razor scrapes all residue, clean

with wire brush and solvent and wipe with solvent cleaner as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Provide sealant primer at metal surfaces to receive sealant. Install bond breaker tape over metal joint and install silicone sealant.

B. Wet Glazing work shall not be performed on operable metal to metal joints. All windows will

remain operable. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Contractor shall provide materials, tools, equipment, and services required for the proper

execution, and completion of work as indicated on the drawings, noted in the Summary of Work, and noted herein, or as required by project conditions to provide complete remedial work.

B. Cleaning and application of sealant at open and unsealed metal to metal joints in window

system. C. Sealing of joints required to provide watertight and airtight construction.

D. Issuance of specified warranties.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. When a conflict exits with these specifications, the more restrictive document shall govern. 1. Sealants: The Professionals’ Guide, Sealant, Waterproofing & Restoration Institute 2. Technical Manual, Dow Corning Americas 3. ASTM C 794, Standard Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants 4. ASTM C 920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 5. ASTM C 1135, Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Properties of

Structural Sealants 6. ASTM C 1184, Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants 7. ASTM C 1193, Standard Guide for Used of Joint Sealants

8. ASTM C 1249, Standard Guide for Secondary Sealed Insulating Glass for Structural Sealant Glazing Applications

9. ASTM C 1265, Standard Test Method for Determining the Tensile Properties of an Insulating Glass Edge Seal for Structural Glazing Application

1.04 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Summary - Section 011000

B. Cleaning of Glass - Section 088000.02


A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association (FMGA)



"Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Installation Qualifications: Work shall be performed by a firm having not less than 5 years

successful experience in comparable restoration projects and employing personnel skilled in the restoration processes and operations indicated.

C. Contractor shall assign a full-time site superintendent (foreman) to the project whose

qualifications have been submitted to and approved by the Owner and Consultant. This site superintendent/foreman shall have a minimum of five-years experience in similar work and shall have been in the employment of this Contractor for at least one year.

D. The Contractor shall be approved by the sealant manufacturer to install the work and qualify for

the specified warranties. E. During the course of sealant work, the contractor shall perform field adhesion tests in addition to

testing performed by the manufacturer and the Consultant. 1. Field adhesion tests shall be made and documented as outlined in the manufacturer's

guidelines. Maintain Field/Shop Adhesion Testing Log, Log 8810-01 2. These adhesion test results shall be submitted to both the manufacturer and the

Consultant in writing on a monthly basis. The reports shall be submitted to the Consultant with, or prior to, submittal of the pay request in order for payment to be processed on that work.

3. Maintain Product Quality Control Log – One-Part Silicone Sealants on a daily basis. Submit with monthly payment.

F. Single Source Responsibility: Provide materials obtained from one source for each type of glass

and glazing indicated. 1. Provide primers, joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible

with existing materials, with one another, and join substrates and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by field testing and field experience as supplied and warranted by one manufacturer.

2. Provide joint sealer materials that have been produced to establish and maintain

watertight and airtight continuous seals. G. Materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection by the Owner or Consultant at all times.

Such inspections do not relieve Contractor from obligation to provide materials and workmanship conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents.

H. Contractor to provide swing stage operators and swing stage access to allow the Consultant to

make timely inspections of the Contractor's work. I. Pre-construction field testing of sealants: Prior to installation of joint sealants, Contractor and

Manufacturer shall perform testing on actual substrates to determine the proper field preparation required to obtain optimum adhesion and compatibility on each different substrate condition.

J. Manufacturer's technical representative shall make regular inspections of the Contractor's work

and the performance of glazing sealants. These inspections shall average intervals not exceeding eighteen days and the maximum average time between inspections over the duration of the work shall not exceed fourteen days.

1. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate manufacturer's field inspections and to receive and distribute manufacturer's field inspection reports.

2. Failure of manufacturer to make inspections and issue reports shall be cause to withhold payment to Contractor.

3. Manufacturer's representative shall inspect installation of products as required to provide



written reports verifying that surfaces are properly prepared and products are installed properly and shall result in the specified warranty at the completion of work. Send these reports to the Consultant.

4. Manufacturer's representative shall perform field adhesion and peel tests at regular intervals to verify performance of sealant product.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each glazing material product required,

including installation and maintenance instructions.

B. Submit written evidence that contractor is pre-approved by the manufacturer for application of the products for the specified warranty.

C. Sealant: 1. Manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing colors

of sealant to be used for this project. 2. MSDS Sheets D. Certificates from the Manufacturer including and attesting: 1. That manufacturer has reviewed this specification and their products comply with specification

requirements and are suitable for project purposes. 2. That they have visited the jobsite, and have conducted such tests as they deem necessary, and

that the usage of their submitted products shall result in the issuance of their required warranties. 3. Test reports from manufacturer indicating proper substrate preparation for this project resulting

from on site adhesion testing. 4. Designation of Manufacturer's Representative for purposes of this project. 1.07 MOCK-UP

A. At start of project, Contractor shall perform a mock-up of required work at one area of the building. B. Mock-up shall include one floor of window work.

1. Location of mock-up shall be coordinated with Owner and Consultant. 2. Mock-up may be in conjunction with other mock-ups as required by this Project Manual.

C. Mock-up shall include: 1. Cleaning of masonry, window frame, glass. 2. Installation of Joint Sealers (Refer to Section 07911). 3. Cleaning of glass (Refer to Section 08860).

D. Mock-up shall be installed in the presence of the sealant manufacturer’s technical representative and

Consultant to assure installation procedures adhere to warranty requirements.

E. After sealant and wet-glazing sealant have achieved sufficient cure as coordinated with manufacturer’s representative, conduct a water hose test to assure installation procedures properly restrict moisture intrusion. 1. Water test shall be confirmed as acceptable by Owner, Consultant, and sealant manufacturer

prior to work proceeding.

F. Approved mock-up shall remain in place and establish the guidelines for acceptable installation of work and acceptable appearance.



1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to project site in original containers with labels indicating pertinent data such as manufacturer, product name and designation, batch numbers, color, texture, expiration date, pot life, and MSDS sheets.

1. Nonconforming materials or products shall not be accepted or installed. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent

deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature, contaminants, or other causes. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following

conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint

sealer manufacturers. 2. When joint substrate are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers when joint widths are less

than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated.

C. Contractor shall complete Waterproofing Daily Completion Checklist each day. Record general weather conditions, areas worked for that day, wind direction and speed, and inspections by manufacturers.

D. Provide weather protection as required to not allow water penetration to interior of building during

inclement weather. 1.10 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall provide Owner a written warranty against leakage and defects in workmanship or

materials for a period of five (5) years from the date of final completion. B. Manufacturer shall provide Owner a written warranty against defects in materials for a period of ten

(10) years from the date of final completion. Warranty shall state that manufacturer shall pay unrestricted costs for materials to replace failed materials.

C. Failure of materials or workmanship shall include, but not limited to: 1. Water penetration into the building. 2. Air infiltration into the building. 3. Adhesive or cohesive failure of sealants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with single source materials and warranty

requirements, manufacturers offering products and warranties which may be incorporated in the work the following:

1. Dow Corning a. 795 Silicone Building Sealant 2.02 SEALANTS A. General: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glazing



sealants which have performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation.

B. Compatibility: Select sealants with proven compatibility with surfaces contacted in the installation

and under service conditions indicated, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. C. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by

Owner from manufacturer's standard colors.

D. Silicone Glazing Sealant: Single component neutral-cure moisture curing elastomeric silicone sealant complying with FS TT-S-001543A, Class A; and with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.


A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by Contractor subject to approval of Project Manager.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints for defects that would adversely affect quality of installation. B. Examine substrates, adjoining construction and conditions under which work is to be installed. Do

not proceed with work until conditions that are unsatisfactory or detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean window gaskets and other framing members and glass, immediately before sealing. Remove coatings, which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use. Remove all foreign matter and contaminates such as grease, oil, dust, water, frost, surface dirt, old sealants, glazing compounds, and protective coatings. 1. Dust, loose particles, etc., shall be cleaned from joints. 2. Metal, glass, and plastic surfaces shall be cleaned by solvent cleaner, isopropyl alcohol, or other

cleaning agents approved by manufacturer and consultant. Cleaning agents shall be wiped on and off with clean, oil-free, and lint-free cloths. a. Use cleaning agents as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

C. Place old sealant and materials removed from joint in disposal bags on the swing stage. Do not

allow sealant residues or other debris to drop to the ground or surface below. D. Prepare metal surfaces using appropriate method, which does not damage metal or metal finish.

Install bond breaker tape at metal-to-metal joints subject to movement. E. Adhesion test: Apply silicone sealant to small area and perform adhesion test in accordance with

ASTM C1193, Method A, to determine if primer is required to achieve adequate adhesion. If necessary, apply primer at rate and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Masking: Apply masking tape as required to protect adjacent surfaces and to ensure straight bead

line and facilitate cleaning. G. Cleaning: 1. Clean and prepare joint adhesion surfaces to remove all traces and residues of old sealants and



other contaminates. Clean with approved process as determined by pre-construction testing and recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer.

2. Clean all non-porous adhesion surfaces with approved "two step, two cloth method":

a. Use convenient sized dispenser such that cleaning agent can be applied to cloth without contaminating cleaning agent supply.

b. Saturate clean lint-free cloth with approved cleaning agent and wipe/scrub surface. c. Before cleaning agent evaporates, wipe surface dry with a second clean dry cloth. 3.03 SEALING – GENERAL A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of manufacturers of sealants, gaskets, and other

glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards.

3.04 SEALANT APPLICATION A. Force sealants into glazing areas to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of

sealant to metal surfaces. B. Sealant: 1. Verify that temperature and moisture conditions are within manufacturer's acceptable limits. 2. Using fresh sealant and clean equipment, fill joint with sealant as to not leave entrapped air, but

without changing the depth of the joint backer glazing materials, and in sufficient amounts that the tooled joint shall have proper depth and profile and shall terminate against the joint substrates facing in a concave profile.

3. Provide uniform cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths and configuration, which allow optimum sealant movement capability.

C. Tooling: 1. Tool joints to required configuration in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Completed sealant application shall resemble an extruded product. 3. Tooling Non-Sag Sealants: a. Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants

to a smooth, uniform bead of required configuration. b. Eliminate air pockets and ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. c. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. d. Do not use tooling tools or procedures, which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or affect

curing or adhesion. Use procedures approved by sealant manufacturer. e. Protect fresh sealant from impact and dust until surface sets. D. Masking: 1. Provide masking tape or other protection as required to prevent materials from being applied to

surfaces where they are not required. 2. Provide masking tape on glass as required for sealant to be placed in straight and even lines. 3. If proper appearance, acceptable to the owner and Consultant, can be achieved without masking,

masking will not be required. E. Metal to Metal Joints at Window Frame:

1. Remove existing sealant. 2. Using a wire brush wet in an isopropyl alcohol or solvent cleaner such as MEK or Xylene, abrade

residue sealant and/or clean aluminum frame. 3. After existing sealant appears removed and/or frame appears clean, perform a final cleaning

wipe by the two-cloth wipe method.



4. Install a 1/4" wide bond breaker tape over joint to be sealed. 5. Install silicone sealant over the bond breaker tape to the window frame. Provide a minimum 1/4"

contact on both sides of tape and install sealant to a thickness of approximately 1/4". 3.05 CLEANING

A. Following glazing operations, aluminum framing shall be cleaned of any dirt, fingerprints, or excess sealant resulting from work.

B. Glass shall be cleaned by conventional glass cleaning methods after completion of building washing

and application of masonry dampproofing agents. If cleaning is conducted prior to glazing, glass shall be cleaned again by conventional glass cleaning methods.

C. Remove debris and containers from job site on a daily basis.

3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from vertical wall washing

operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by material manufacturer.

3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform adhesion tests in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C1193, Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand-Pull Tab. 1. Perform five (5) tests for first 1,000 linear feet of applied silicone and one (1) test for each 1,000

feet of sealant thereafter or perform one (1) test per floor per building elevation minimum. 2. For sealants applied between dissimilar materials, test both sides of the joint.

B. Sealants failing adhesion test shall be removed, substrates cleaned, sealants re-installed, and

re-testing performed.

C. Follow all requirements and maintain test log for structural/weatherseal applications and submit report to Architect indicating tests, locations, dates, results, and remedial actions.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS GLASS CLEANING 088000.02 - 1

SECTION 088000.02

GLASS CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Clean glass as the last item of work after other work has been completed and prior to date

scheduled for inspection to establish date of substantial completion. Clean all openings and fixed glass at area of Library affected by work.


A. Standards: Test prior to beginning full scale cleaning operations to determine dilution ratio of

detergents, compatibility with glass surface, and to establish an acceptable standard for glass cleaning. Allow test panels of glass to dry thoroughly before inspection and evaluation of final appearance and results. Review cleaned area of glass with Owner and Consultant to determine acceptability.

B. Installation Qualifications: Work shall be performed by a firm having not less than five years

successful experience in comparable projects and employing personnel skilled in the cleaning processes and operations indicated.

C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide cleaning products approved for use by glazing sealant

manufacturer. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type cleaning product required,

including application and storage instructions.

B. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all products used in conjunction with this project. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect glass cleaning materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with

manufacturer's directions and as required to prevent damage to cleaning materials. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Avoid application to surfaces in direct sunlight or high winds. Where necessary to apply in

sunlight, the glass shall be cooled by pre-wetting with clean water to below 900 before applying the cleaning solution.

1.06 PROJECT PRECAUTIONS

A. Protect surrounding metal, masonry, concrete, painted surfaces, adjacent plant life, and other

sensitive materials from exposure to the cleaning solution. B. Test and protect as required, all surfaces to assure cleaning solutions do not stain or discolor

finished surfaces. C. Take precautions to avoid harm to building occupants, pedestrians, near by property,

automobiles, and all surfaces by contact with the cleaner, rinse water, or fumes.



D. Beware of drifting of sprayed material or rinse water. Pedestrian and auto traffic shall be diverted or protected.

E. When working over traffic, clean glass only when traffic is at a minimum and protect carefully. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cleaning Solutions 1. Subject to cleaning a test panel of glass and establishing acceptability with the Owner and

Consultant, the following cleaning solutions are acceptable for glass cleaning. a. Arcal Chemicals, Inc.: PG Glass Cleaner - liquid non-acid concentrate with ammonia. b. Products of other manufacturers tested at the site and submitted to Consultant for review.

B. Contractor shall work with cleaner manufacturer for test cleaning of glass to establish weakest

solution that will satisfactorily clean glass as judged by Owner and Consultant. 2.02 GLASS CLEANER A. General: Comply with recommendations of glass cleaning solution manufacturer for selection of

glass cleaning products and procedures which have performance characteristics suitable to properly clean the glass under conditions present at time of cleaning.

B. Compatibility: Select type of cleaner and ratio of dilution that has proven compatibility with glass

surfaces contacted and under service conditions indicated, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Test prior to beginning full scale cleaning operations to determine dilution rate and compatibility

with glass surfaces. To evaluate final appearance and results, allow test panels to dry thoroughly before inspection.

3.02 DILUTIONS A. Dilution shall be as recommended and approved by cleaning compound manufacturer as

conditions dictate and as reviewed with Consultant.

B. When diluting, pour water into empty bucket first, then carefully add concentrate. 3.03 APPLICATION

A. After protecting sensitive surfaces, and when the proper strength solution has been prepared, proceed with glass cleaning operations.

B. Procedure:

1. Work shall proceed in sections. Do not allow cleaner to dry on surface. 2. Pre-wet surface to be cleaned and the areas directly beneath with pressurized cold water. If

application is done in direct sunlight, pre-wet in sufficient quantity to cool glass surface. 3. Apply solution of cleaner in a gentle, circular, scrubbing manner using a soft bristled washing



brush. 4. Rinse all traces of cleaning agents and residue with pressurized water at pressure not to

exceed 40 psi. Squeegee excess water from glass. Dry with clean lint-free cloth if required. C. Rinse procedures shall extend to rinsing all affected surfaces of the building to remove traces of

cleaning products and resultant dirt. Final appearance of building shall be clean. D. Repeat application and cleaning procedures if necessary for removal of persistent stains or

deposits.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116 - 1

SECTION 092116

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.

B. Metal stud wall framing.

C. Gypsum sheathing.

D. Gypsum wallboard.

E. Joint treatment and accessories.



B. Section 054000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wind-load-bearing metal stud framing.

C. Section 072500 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.


A. AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971)

B. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (R2005).

C. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (R2005).

D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007.

E. ASTM C 475/C 475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007).

F. ASTM C 645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2007.

G. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006.

H. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2007.

I. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2007.

J. ASTM C 954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2007.

K. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2007.

L. ASTM C 1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2005.

M. ASTM C 1177/C 1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2006.



N. ASTM C 1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing; 2007.

O. ASTM C 1288 - Standard Specification for Discrete Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement Interior Substrate Sheets; 1999 (Reapproved 2004).

P. ASTM C 1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cement Substrate Sheets; 2004.

Q. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2006a.

R. ASTM C 1658/C 1658M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels; 2006.

S. ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2000 (Reapproved 2005).

T. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction; 2005.

U. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2007.

V. GA-226 - Application of Gypsum Board to Form Curved Surfaces; Gypsum Association; 1996.

W. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.

B. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies complying with applicable code. 1. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular

assembly in the current UL Fire Resistance Directory.

2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/120 at 5 psf except as follows: 1. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM C

645 are waived provided steel of 40 ksi minimum yield strength is used, the metal is continuously dimpled, the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness, and maximum stud heights are determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 72 using assemblies specified by ASTM C 754.

2. Studs: C shaped, punched for utility access. 20 gauge minimum unless otherwise noted. 3. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. Provide deep leg runners at top of partitions. 4. Ceiling Channels: C shaped. 5. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch. 6. Backing Plates for Wall Mounted Items: Manufacturer's standard backing sheet; size as

needed to suit project conditions.

B. Loadbearing Studs for Application of Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 054000.

2.04 BOARD MATERIALS

A. Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces. 2. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested



assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 3. Thickness: Match existing.

B. Exterior Sheathing Board: Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Exterior sheathing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273. 3. Glass-Mat-Faced Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum substrate as defined in ASTM C

1177/C 1177M. 4. Core Type: Regular. 5. Regular Board Thickness: ½” or as required to match existing thickness. 6. Edges: V-shaped tongue and groove, for horizontal application or square for vertical

application. 7. Glass-Mat-Faced Products:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc Brand. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensGlass Gold Sheathing. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand e2XP Extended Exposure Sheathing. d. Temple-Inland Inc; Greenglass Fiberglass-Faced Gypsum Sheathing. e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 25000.

B. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C 1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. 2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide U-bead

and LC-bead at exposed panel edges.

C. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. 2. Vinyl based or chemical hardening type compound.

D. Textured Finish Materials: Match existing.

E. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations.

F. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 Inch in Thickness: ASTM C 954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs.

G. Paint: Type and color as required to match existing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.

3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center unless indicated otherwise. 1. Extend partition framing to structure in all locations.

3.03 BOARD AND GLASS MAT FACED BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations.



B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.

C. Double-Layer Non-Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed perpendicular to framing or furring members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Place second layer perpendicular to framing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer.

D. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing.

E. Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C 1280. Install sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing.

F. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board except face layer of non-rated double-layer assemblies, which may be installed by means of adhesive lamination.

G. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in glass mat faced board with sealant.

3.04 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound. 1. Treat exterior sheathing joints in accordance with board manufacturer's instructions.

B. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded with vinyl based or chemical hardening type joint compound and finished with vinyl based or chemical hardening type joint compound.

C. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840, as needed to match existing.

D. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic

tile.

3.08 TEXTURE FINISH

A. Apply finish texture coating by means of spraying apparatus, trowel, roller or brush in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Texture Required: Match existing.

3.09 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.

B. Maximum Variation of Ceramic Tile Backer Board from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 8 feet in any direction.

C. Maximum Deflection of Finished Gypsum Board Ceiling or Soffit at Full Design Load: L/240 or 1/4 inch in 10 feet, whichever is less.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SITE PREPARATION 31 10 00 – 1

SECTION 31 10 00

SITE PREPARATION AND DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This Section includes furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for the preparation of this site and removal of existing pavement, trees and underground utilities as shown by the construction documents.

B. Location and protection of utilities.

C. Site Clearing.


A. SECTION 31 22 00 – EARTHWORK

B. SECTION 31 25 00 – EROSION CONTROL

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. As required by DIVISION 1 requirements.

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING



A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain a temporary water meter and temporary sanitary sewer facilities for use during construction.

B. Provide erosion and sedimentation controls as shown on the drawings and maintain for the duration of the project. Provide routine maintenance as required to maintain the integrity of controls and protection measures and remove any accumulations of mud, silt and debris, which would jeopardize the integrity of the control measures. Refer to drawings for details.

C. Contractor shall exercise care during operations to confine dust to the immediate work area and shall employ dust control measures to ensure adequate dust control throughout demolition and construction operations.

D. The use of explosives is prohibited.


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SITE PREPARATION 31 10 00 – 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION OF EXISTING ACTIVE UTILITIES

A. The Contractor shall field verify and coordinate with Owner the location and depths of existing active utilities service lines within the construction limits and shall protect all such utilities from damage during construction operations. Damage to existing utilities to remain shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense for re-establishing the utilities to their pre-damaged condition.

3.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING ON AND OFF-SITE PAVING

A. The Contractor shall protect all adjacent on and off-site paving and appurtenances from damage. Any damage shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense.

3.3 SITE CLEARING

A. Contractor shall remove all trees as shown on the plans. Trees less than six (6) inches in calipers and shrubs located within the construction area shall also be removed. Trees located within and/or adjacent to the area of construction shall be protected per the plans. Contractor shall remove all grasses and topsoil to a minimum depth of four (4) inches.

B. Contractor shall remove all pavements, concrete and brick pavers, and curb and gutter as shown on the plans.

C. Contractor shall remove light standards, bases and foundations to full depth, as shown on the plans. Existing water and gas lines shall be cut and plugged. Existing public meters and public fire hydrants shall be returned to the local governing authority or disposed of at no additional cost to Owner.

D. Exposed subgrade shall be proof rolled with at least a 15-ton pneumatic roller to detect weak soil support areas. All weak soil areas, utility trenches and excavated areas shall be filled and compacted per SECTION 31 22 00.

3.4 FINAL CLEANUP

A. Remove all traces of demolished items from the site work area and rough grade all areas that have been disturbed.

B. All removed items shall be legally disposed of off-site at no additional cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION 31 10 00


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EARTHWORK 31 22 00 – 1

SECTION 31 22 00

EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section includes operations required for the excavation of materials on site, compaction of natural or improved subgrades, finish grading, disposal of excess or unsuitable materials, and other required operations. Earthwork shall conform with dimensions and typical sections shown, and within lines and grades established on Drawings.


A. SECTION 31 10 00 – SITE PREPARATION AND DEMOLITION

B. SECTION 32 13 13 – PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM)

1. ASTM D1557 – Test for Moisture-Density Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort 2. ASTM D2487 – Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil

Classification) 3. ASTM D2922 – Test for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Method 4. ASTM D3017 – Test for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Method 5. ASTM D4318 – Test for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils 6. ASTM G51 – Test for Measuring pH of Soil for Use in Corrosion Testing 7. ASTM G57 – Test for Field Measurement of Soil Resistivity

1.4 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Where pipes, ducts and structures are encountered in the excavation but are not shown on the Drawings, immediately notify the Architect.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Classification: Earthwork materials are classified in accordance with definitions in this Article.

B. General Site Fill: If additional soil is required to achieve the elevations shown on the drawings, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain the needed soil from an approved source. Excess soil may be utilized on-site in areas designated by Owner; otherwise, the Contractor shall legally dispose excess soil off-site at no additional cost to Owner.



C. Select Fill: Additional soil beneath sidewalk, pavements, foundations and other structures required to achieve the elevations shown on the drawing. Select fill material shall be as required by the Geotechnical report.

D. Subgrade: Consists of that portion of the surface on which a compacted fill, backfill, pavement or topsoil is placed.

E. Borrow: Material taken from approved off-site sources to make up any deficit of excavated material. Obtain from area that is normally dry and well drained. Borrow does not include topsoil.

F. Finish Grading: Operations required for smoothing disturbed areas that are not overlaid with pavement.

G. Excavation: Excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered within the limits of the project to the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings.

H. Compaction: Compaction of soil materials shall be measured as a percent of Standard Proctor density as determined in the laboratory by the ASTM D689 and measured in the field by ASTM D2922 and ASTM D3017.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit laboratory testing reports for each soil borrow source used to supply general fill and select fill materials.



B. The Owner may engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field inspections and tests, and to prepare test reports. When such testing indicates that Contractor’s work does not comply with the specified requirements, additional testing shall be performed by the Owner’s testing agency at no additional cost to the Owner to determine compliance of corrected Work with the specified requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SELECT FILL

A. Select fill material shall be clayey sand or sandy clay having a liquid limit (LL) of 35 percent or less and a plasticity index (PI) not less than 5 or greater than 15 with no particles greater than 2-1/2 inches in diameter. The select fill shall contain no deleterious material and shall be compacted to a dry density of at least 95 percent of Standard Proctor by ASTM D689 and a moisture content within minus one (-1) and to plus three (+3) percent of optimum moisture.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Objective: As shown on the Drawings, excavate to lines, grades and elevations required for subsequent construction. All excavation shall be made in such manner as to permit all surfaces to be brought to final line and grade within plus or minus 0.1 foot. Over excavation shall be restored at no additional cost to the Owner. Finished grades consistently high or low will not be acceptable and shall be corrected at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Drainage: During excavation, maintain grades as required to maintain drainage; or, as directed by the Architect, install temporary drains or drainage ditches to intercept or divert surface water and prevent interference or delay of the work.

C. Stockpiling: If at time of excavation it is not possible to place material in the proper section of permanent construction, stockpile the material in Architect approved areas for later use.

D. Stone or Rock: Stone or rock fragments greater than 6" will not be allowed in fills or embankments. Stones or rock fragments larger than 2 inches in their greatest dimension will not be permitted in top 6 inches of subgrade.

3.2 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. Surface vegetation, existing pavements, and other deleterious materials shall be stripped in accordance with SECTION 31 10 00.

B. Fill Soil Subgrades: The exposed in-situ soil shall be proof-rolled using heavy rubber-tired construction equipment; e.g., 25-ton loaded tandem-axle dump truck. Approved on-site clays can be used for pavement and subgrade fill. Soil shall be free of organic materials and other debris, and rock fragments greater than 2-1/2 inches. Fill shall be placed in maximum 8-inch loose lifts and compacted to at least 95% Standard Proctor maximum laboratory dry density as determined by ASTM D 698 at a moisture content within minus one (-1) and to plus three (+3) percent of optimum moisture

C. Only on-site soils shall be used to fine grade the subgrade – sand shall not be permitted. After fine grading the subgrade, the subgrade moisture content and density shall be maintained until paving is completed. Water and/or re-compact the subgrade as necessary to restore the required moisture and density levels, and to provide a tight, non-yielding subgrade.

3.3 PLACING FILL AND BACKFILL

A. Examination of Subgrade: Do not place fill on any part of the subgrade until Owner has accepted the subgrade preparation.

B. Removing Debris: During the dumping and spreading process, remove all roots, stones and debris that are uncovered in the fill material.

C. Spreading Fill and Backfill: After dumping, spread the material in horizontal layers over the entire fill area. The thickness of each layer before compaction shall not exceed 8 inches. Maintain positive drainage throughout construction. The combined excavation and fill placing



operation shall be such that the material when compacted in the fill will be blended sufficiently to secure the best practicable degree of compaction. The suitability of the materials shall be subject to approval of the Owner. After each layer of fill has been spread to the proper depth, it shall be thoroughly manipulated with a disc plow or other suitable and approved equipment until the material is uniformly mixed, pulverized and brought to uniform approved moisture content.

D. Attaining Proper Bond: If, in the opinion of the Owner, the compacted surface of a layer is too smooth to bond with succeeding layers, loosen the surface by harrowing or other approved method before continuing the work.

3.4 MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Intent: The required density is desired on the wet side of the natural moisture content in order to limit post construction swelling of the clay soils.

B. Adjustment: If the moisture content is too high, adjust to within the specified limits by spreading the material and permitting it to dry. Assist the drying process by disking or harrowing if necessary. When the material is too dry, sprinkle each layer with water. Work the moisture into the soil by harrowing or other approved method.

3.5 COMPACTION

A. Rough Grade: Compact each layer of fill material with suitable equipment as necessary to achieve an in-place soil density of at least 95% Standard Proctor maximum laboratory dry density as determined by ASTM D698 and a moisture content within minus one (-1) and to plus three (+3) percent of optimum moisture.

1. Field moisture-density of compacted soil layers will be determined by the Owner’s quality control testing laboratory. Additional laboratory testing may be performed to monitor any changes in the soil moisture-density relationship and adjust field testing accordingly.

B. Finish Grade: Place and lightly compact topsoil to achieve finish grades.

3.6 MATERIAL DISPOSAL

A. Excess Excavation Material (soil material free of trees, stumps, logs, brush, roots, rubbish and other objectionable matter which has been accepted by Owner): Remove excess excavated material from the construction site before Pre-final Inspection.

B. Waste Material (material including trees, stumps, logs, brush, roots, rubbish and other objectionable matter which has not been accepted by Owner): Remove waste material from the project site before final Inspection. Legally dispose of material at a licensed site or with written and notarized permission from the property owner for a private disposal site. Pay for all costs associated with waste material removal and disposal.

3.7 TESTING

A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection Services: As specified in DIVISION 1.



B. The Owner may employ a geotechnical laboratory testing agency to monitor soil quality and compaction of fill during construction. The laboratory testing agency will adhere to the following testing procedures:

1. Inspect and test each lift of select fill material. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work verify compliance with requirements.

2. Field density and moisture tests will be performed by the nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D2922 and ASTM D3017.

3. When field in-place density and moisture tests are performed using nuclear methods, the moisture/density gages will be checked and calibrated to correlate to laboratory density and moisture values as determined by ASTM D689 at the beginning of each work period.

4. Perform at least one field in-place moisture and density test for every 2,500 square feet of compacted fill per lift, but in no case fewer than five tests for any given lift.

C. Fill material that does not pass field moisture/density testing shall be scarified, watered if necessary, reworked and re-compacted at no additional cost to the Owner. Soil sampling and laboratory testing associated with re-testing of soil materials that are reworked to correct non-compliance with the specified requirements shall not be an additional cost to the Owner.

D. Soil sampling and laboratory testing associated with identification of acceptable borrow sources shall not be an additional cost to the Owner.



CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TRENCH EXCAVATION 31 23 33 – 1

SECTION 312333

TRENCH EXCAVATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section includes furnishing all the labor, equipment and materials for trench excavation of water system, storm sewer, sanitary sewer system and all other miscellaneous utility piping.


A. SECTION 31 23 34 – TRENCH BACKFILL

B. SECTION 33 40 00 – STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Procedures for Submittals: DIVISION 1.

B. Submit laboratory testing reports for each type of excavated or imported soil to be used for trench backfill specified in SECTION 31 23 34.


A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection Services: As specified in DIVISION 1.

B. Sampling and laboratory testing of excavated or imported soils to determine Atterberg Limits and moisture-density compaction characteristics.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Demolition: Complete applicable work specified in SECTION 31 10 00, prior to excavating.

B. Lines and grades to be established by someone under the supervision of a Professional Registered Land Surveyor and who is experienced in laying out utility lines.

C. Trench Support: Install and maintain the trench safety systems as specified in SECTION 31 23 35.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TRENCH EXCAVATION 31 23 33 – 2

3.1 GENERAL

A. Excavate to lines, grades, and dimensions show as necessary to accomplish Work. Unless otherwise noted in the drawings, excavate to within tolerance of plus or minus 0.1 foot. Allow for forms, working space, granular base, topsoil, and similar items, wherever applicable. Trim to neat lines where concrete is to be deposited against earth.

B. Do not over-excavate without written authorization of the Architect.

3.2 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION

A. Excavation is unclassified. Complete all excavation regardless of the type, nature or condition of the materials encountered.

3.3 TRENCH EXCAVATION

A. Cut banks of pipe trench as nearly vertical as practical. Remove stones as necessary to avoid point bearing. Over-excavate wet or unstable soil from the trench bottom to permit construction of a more stable bed for pipe. Over-excavation shall be filed and tamped with clean dry sand or other approved bedding material to the specified grade.

B. Dig the trench to the proper width as shown on the Drawings. If the trench width below the top of pipe is wider than specified, install additional bedding at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Accurately grade the trench bottom to provide proper bedding as required.

D. If any excavation is carried beyond the lines and grades required or authorized, fill such space with concrete or other suitable material as directed by Owner at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.4 DEWATERING

A. At no additional cost to the Owner, provide and maintain on-site all necessary equipment, pumps and appurtenances for ensuring that all excavated trenches shall be dewatered prior to and during the installation of any pipe bedding and/or pipe material and until backfill is complete.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL

A. Disposal of excavated soils shall be performed in a legal manner and be removed from the site unless needed.

B. Disposal of debris resulting from removal of subsurface utilities shall be as specified in SECTION 31 10 00.



CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TRENCH BACKFILL 312334 - 1

SECTION 31 23 34

TRENCH BACKFILL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section includes furnishing all labor, materials and equipment for trench backfilling for site utilities with appurtenances, which occur five feet (5’) outside of all building structures.


A. SECTION 31 10 00 – SITE PREPARATION AND DEMOLITION

B. SECTION 33 40 00 – STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C33 – Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregates

B. ASTM D424 – Test for Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils

C. ASTM D698 – Test for Moisture-Density Characteristics of Soils Using Standard Effort

D. ASTM D1557 – Test for Moisture-Density Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

E. ASTM D2922 – Test for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Method

F. ASTM D3017 – Test for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Method

G. ASTM D4318 – Test for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit laboratory testing reports for each type of excavated or imported soil to be used for trench backfill specified in this Section.

C. Submit pipe bedding material product data, including material supplier, borrow source identification, and laboratory soil classification and particle gradation analyses.


A. Comply with the provisions of DIVISION 1.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE BEDDING

A. Pipe bedding material for water, sewer and storm drainage lines shall be installed per the plans.

B. Pipe shall be backfilled with a crushed stone to 12 inches above the top of pipe. Backfill material shall have a liquid limit (LL) of no greater than 35 and a plasticity index (PI) of no greater than 10. Backfill material shall be graded as follows:

Passing 2 in. sieve 100% Passing ½-inch sieve 50 to 85% Passing No. 4 sieve 20 to 65% Passing No. 100 sieve 0 to 5%

2.2 BACKFILL MATERIAL

A. Under Non-Structural Areas: The backfill material placed above the crushed stone bedding shall consist of Select Fill material, meeting the requirements of SECTION 31 22 00.

B. Under Structural Areas: The backfill material placed above the crushed stone bedding shall consist of cement stabilized sand consisting of 1-1/2 sack mix or with flowable fill.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Grade as necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations.

B. Pipe Zone: The pipe zone is defined as including the pipe bedding, backfill to one-half the pipe diameter (the springline) and the initial backfill to 12 inches above the top of the pipe or as otherwise shown on the drawings.

C. Pipe Bedding: Pipe bedding material shall be installed within the pipe zone per the plans.

D. Water in Excavation: Take such precautions as are necessary to keep the work free from ground or surface water. Pumps of adequate capacity or other approved method shall be provided to remove water from the trench in such a manner that it will not interfere with the progress of the work or the proper placing of other work. Ground or surface water will not be allowed to drain into or be pumped into an existing sanitary sewer system. If the work includes connection to an existing sanitary sewer, a temporary watertight plug must be installed and maintained within the pipe for the duration of the contract and bedding material interrupted in a manner approved by the Architect to isolate new construction from the



existing system. All costs of handling the water shall be included in the bid and at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.2 UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. Limit clear space on either side of the pipe and below the pipe to the dimensions shown on the drawings. Above the pipe zone, cut as wide as necessary to sheet and brace and properly perform the work. Provide select fill per the drawings.

B. Excavation for Appurtenances: Excavate sufficiently for manholes, utility pull boxes, and similar structures to leave at least 2 feet clear between the outer surfaces and the embankment of timber that may be used to hold and protect the banks. Any over-depth excavation below such appurtenances not directed will be considered unauthorized and will be refilled with sand, gravel, or concrete as directed at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.3 BACKFILLING UNDER NON-STRUCTURAL AREAS

A. The Contractor is not to leave an open trench longer than 200 linear feet on a daily basis.

B. Do not backfill trenches to a point greater than 2 feet above top of pipe until all required pressure tests are performed and utility systems as installed conform to the requirements of appropriate sections. Joints or sewer and water piping shall remain exposed until acceptance of the pressure and leakage tests. Backfill trenches to ground surface with material as specified. Re-open trenches improperly backfilled to depth required for proper compaction. Refill and re-compact as specified, or otherwise correct the condition in a manner approved by Owner.

C. Open Areas

1. In the pipe zone, place backfill evenly and carefully around, under and over pipe in layers no thicker than 6 inches. Compact with mechanical hand tampers to 90% density of Standard Proctor maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D698, until there is a cover of not less than 1 foot over utility lines. Use backfill material as called for on the drawings. Take special care not to damage pipe wrapping or coating.

2. Above the pipe zone, deposit Low-Plasticity Cohesive Soils in 8 inch layers. The soils shall have a liquid limit (LL) of 35 percent or less and a plasticity index (PI) not less than 5 nor greater than 15. Compact each layer to 90% Standard Proctor maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698 at -1 to +3 percentage points of optimum moisture content.

3. All forms, lumber, trash and debris shall be removed from manholes and other utility structures. Backfill for manholes, utility pull boxes, and other utility structures shall be placed symmetrically on all sides in layers no thicker than 8 inches. Each layer shall be compacted to 90% of Standard Proctor maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698.

3.4 BACKFILLING UNDER STRUCTURAL AREAS

A. The Contractor is not to leave an open trench longer than 200 linear feet on a daily basis.

B. Do not backfill trenches to a point greater than 2 feet above top of pipe until all required pressure tests are performed and utility systems as installed conform to the requirements of



appropriate sections. Joints or sewer and water piping shall remain exposed until acceptance of the pressure and leakage tests. Backfill trenches to ground surface with material as specified. Re-open trenches improperly backfilled to depth required for proper compaction. Refill and re-compact as specified, or otherwise correct the condition in a manner approved by Owner.

C. Pavement Areas

1. In the pipe zone, deposit backfill material as specified on the drawings in layers 6 inches or less. Compact each layer to 95% of Standard Proctor (ASTM D698) maximum laboratory dry density within plus or minus 2 percentage points.

2. Above the pipe zone, backfill with cement-stabilized sand using a 1½-sack mix or flowable fill. Deposit backfill in 6-inch layers.

3. For manholes and other appurtenances within the pavement area, backfill with select fill material to the subgrade elevation]. Backfill shall be placed in 6-inch layers and compacted to 95% density according to ASTM D698.

3.5 TESTING


B. The Owner may employ a geotechnical laboratory testing agency to monitor soil quality and compaction of fill during construction. The laboratory testing agency will adhere to the following testing procedures:

1. Inspect and test each lift of trench backfill material. Work shall not proceed until test results for previously completed work verify compliance with requirements.

2. Field density and moisture tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM D698. 3. When field in-place density and moisture tests are performed using nuclear methods, the

moisture/density gages will be checked and calibrated to correlate to laboratory density and moisture values as determined by ASTM D698, as applicable, at the beginning of each work period.

4. Perform at least one field in-place moisture and density test for every 100 linear feet of trench per lift of backfill, but in no case fewer than three tests for any given lift.

C. Settling: Where settling occurs, remove finished surfacing, fill with additional approved material, compact and reconstruct surfacing.

D. Trench backfill that does not pass field moisture/density testing shall be scarified, watered if necessary, reworked and re-compacted at no additional cost to the Owner. Soil sampling and laboratory testing associated with re-testing of soil materials that are reworked to correct non-compliance with the specified requirements shall not be an additional cost to the Owner.



CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TERMITE CONTROL Addandum No. 1 313116 - 1

SECTION 313116

TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Chemical soil treatment.




A. Title 7, United States Code, 136 through 136y - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act; United States Code; 1947 (Revised 2001).

B. Section 599 of the Law and Regulations of the Structural Pest Control Board of Texas (SPCB); current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, intended application rate.

C. Test Reports: Indicate regulatory agency approval reports when required.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that toxicants meet or exceed specified requirements and are EPA approved.

E. Certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of toxicants.

F. Record moisture content of soil before application, date and rate of application, areas of application, and diary of toxicity meter readings and corresponding soil coverage. Submit with Closeout Submittals.

G. Maintenance Data: Indicate re-treatment schedule. Submit with Closeout Submittals.

H. Warranty: Submit warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name. Submit with Closeout Submittals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing this type of work and: 1. Having minimum of 2 years documented experience. 2. Approved by manufacturer of treatment materials. 3. Licensed in Texas.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide five year installer's warranty against damage to building caused by termites. 1. Include coverage for repairs to building and to contents damaged due to building damage.

Repair damage and, if required, re-treat. 2. Inspect annually and report in writing to Owner. Provide inspection service for five years

from Date of Substantial Completion.


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TERMITE CONTROL Addandum No. 1 313116 - 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Toxicant Chemical: EPA approved; synthetically color dyed to permit visual identification of treated soil.

B. Diluent: Recommended by toxicant manufacturer.

2.02 MIXES

A. Mix toxicant to manufacturer's instructions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, and ready to receive treatment.

B. Verify final grading is complete.

3.02 APPLICATION

A. Comply with requirements of U.S. EPA and applicable state and local codes.

B. Spray apply or inject toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in compliance with Section 599 of the SPCB and at the following minimum rates: 1. Dilution Ratios: As specified on product label. 2. Minimum Application Rates:

a. Fill Material to be Covered by Slab: 1 gallon per 10 square feet (soil fill). b. Course Fill: 1.5 gallons per 10 square feet or as specified on product label. c. Soil Backfill Areas next to Walls, Piers, Pipes, and Under "Critical Areas" like Slab

Expansion Joints: 4 gallons per 10 linear feet per foot of depth. d. Hollow Masonry Units: 2 gallons per 10 linear feet.

C. Apply toxicant at all disturbed soil locations: 1. At Building Perimeter: Extend away from building 1 foot per foot of depth of soil disturbed

performing water infiltration mitigation work.

D. Under slabs, apply toxicant immediately prior to installation of vapor barrier.

E. At foundation walls, apply toxicant immediately prior to finish grading work outside foundations.

F. Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces such as pipe or ducts, and soil penetrations such as grounding rods or posts.

G. Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment.

H. If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit soil grading over treated work.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 1

SECTION 32 13 13

CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish all labor and materials necessary for forming and placing reinforced concrete pavement to the lines and grades shown on the drawings associated with this project.


A. SECTION 31 22 00 – EARTHWORK

B. SECTION 03 11 00 – CONCRETE FORMWORK

C. SECTION 03 21 00 – CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

D. SECTION 03 31 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. A525 – Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) 2. A615 – Standard Specification for Deformed Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 3. C31 – Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field 4. C39 – Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens 5. C94 – Ready-Mixed Concrete 6. C309 – Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete 7. C1549 – Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient Temperature

Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer. 8. D1751 – Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete and Structural Construction

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit concrete mix designs for each class of concrete, including historical data for the concrete mix used in the same geographical area where the project is located.






1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL OBJECTIVES

A. LEED SS Credit 7.1 Heat Island Effect, Non-roof, Use light-colored / high-albedo materials with a minimum Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) of at least 29 for 50% of the site hardscape.

B. LEED MR Credit 4.1 Recycled Content, 10% (post-consumer + ½ pre-consumer), Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content constitutes at least 10% (based on cost) of the total value of the materials in the project.

C. LEED MR Credit 4.2 Recycled Content, 20% (post-consumer + ½ pre-consumer), Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content constitutes at least 20% (based on cost) of the total value of the materials in the project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

A. Classification and mix design shall be as follows:

1. Concrete strength shall be designed to produce a 3500 psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

2. Maximum size of aggregates 1-1/2 inches. 3. Slump shall range from 1-1/2 to 4 inches. 4. Air entrainment concrete mixture shall have an air content by volume of 5 percent plus or

minus 1.0%. 5. Concrete shall be mixed conforming with ASTM C94. 6. The concrete mix shall be designed by a commercial testing laboratory, and submitted for

approval. 7. The use of Type III cement shall not be permitted without written permission from the

Engineer when Type III cement is not shown on the Drawings.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing steel shall meet the specifications of ASTM A615, Grade 60. Bars shall be deformed billet steel free of defects.

2.3 BOARD FILLER

A. Materials shall be as shown on the Drawings.



B. Board filler shall be free of defects, which will impair their usefulness as expansion joint fillers.

2.4 PREFORMED BITUMINOUS EXPANSION BOARD

A. Preformed bituminous boards shall meet the specifications for ASTM D1751.

2.5 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALING MATERIAL

A. Cold applied joint sealants, two part urethane (self leveling) sealant equal to “Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant” by Sonneborn, “Urexpan NR-200” by Pecora, or “THC-900” by Tremco, or equal.

2.6 DEFORMED CONTRACTION JOINT METAL STRIPS

A. Deformed contraction joint metal strips shall be 28 ga. steel, galvanized 1.25 oz. per square foot or heavier and meet the specifications of ASTM A525.

2.7 CURING COMPOUND

A. Curing compound shall conform to the specifications if ASTM C309, Type 2, white pigmented.

2.8 LOAD TRANSMISSION DEVICES FOR EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS

A. Load Transmission devices shall be as detailed on plans and conform to the properties specified in ASTM A615, Grade 60 steel.

2.9 STEEL DOWEL BARS

A. Steel dowel bars and steel reinforcement shall be deformed or smooth bars conform on properties to ASTM A615 Grade 60. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, all reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars, all dowel bars at joints shall be smooth bars, and all curb dowels shall be deformed bars.

PART 3 - CONSTRUCTION

3.1 PAVEMENT

A. Placing and removing forms.

1. Forms shall be of wood or metal, properly treated to insure concrete does not adhere to the forms, straight, clean, free from warp or defect, and of sufficient depth. The forms shall be so placed that when each form section will be firmly in contact for its whole length and base width and exactly at the established grade. Any subgrade under the forms below established grade shall be corrected using suitable material, placed,



sprinkled, and rolled. Forms shall be securely staked and tightly joined and keyed to prevent displacement. Sufficient stability of forms to support equipment operated thereon and to withstand its vibration without springing shall be required. Forms shall remain in place not less than 24 hours after concrete is placed.

B. If the slip form method of paving is used, the equipment shall meet the following requirements:

1. Side Forms. Side forms shall be of metal except as otherwise provided herein and shall be of approved cross section. The length of form sections shall not be less than 10 feet, and each section shall provide for staking in position with not less than three (3) pins. Forms shall be of ample strength and shall be provided with adequate devices to secure them in place so the forms will withstand, without visible springing or settlement, the impact and vibration of the spreading and finishing machinery. In no case shall the base of the form be less than eight (8) inches wide for a form depth of eight (8) inches or more in height. The forms shall be free from warps, bends or kinks, and shall be sufficiently true to provide a reasonably straight edge on the concrete. The top of each form section, when tested with a straight edge, shall conform to the requirements specified for the surface of the completed pavement. A sufficient number of forms shall be provided for satisfactory prosecution of the work.

2. Flexible or curved forms of wood or metal of proper radius shall be used for curves of 100 foot radius or less.

3. The preferred depth of the form shall be equal to the required edge thickness of the pavement. Forms with depth greater or less than the required edge thickness of the pavement will be permitted provided the difference between the form depth and the edge thickness is not greater than two (2) inches, and further provided that:

a. Forms of a depth greater than the pavement edge may be used if the supporting material is planed to construct a form trench.

b. Forms of a depth less than the pavement edge shall be brought to the required edge thickness by securely attaching metal strips or wood shims of approved section to the full width and length of the base of the form.

4. Curb Forms. Outside curb forms shall be of wood or metal of a section satisfactory to the Engineer, straight, free of warp, and shall be of a depth at least equal to the depth of the curb. They shall be securely mounted on the paving forms and maintained in true position during the placing of the concrete. Inside curb forms, if required, shall be of approved material and of such design as to provide the curb required and shall be rigidly attached to the outside curbs forms.

C. Joints in Concrete Pavement.

1. Joints shall be constructed in the pavement slab at locations and according to details as shown on the Drawings. Sealants shall be installed per manufactures recommendations. Stakes, braces, brackets or other devices shall be used as necessary to keep the entire joint assembly in true vertical and horizontal position.

2. All construction joints shall be saw cut as soon as the concrete will support the combined weights of the cutting equipment and the operator but no more than four (4) hours after the concrete is poured.

3. When prefabricated plastic strips are used to form joints, they shall be placed after the concrete surface has been leveled and before the finishing is completed. The strips shall be of a type specifically manufactured for the purpose of forming joints in concrete pavement and to the dimensions as required to form the specified joints. The strips shall be removed after the concrete has set per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Any



blemishes caused by the removal of the strips shall be repaired immediately using approved methods.

D. Tie Bars and Load Transmission Devices.

1. Shall be accurately placed as shown on Drawings and held securely (parallel to pavement surface and perpendicular to joint) during placing and finishing of pavement.

E. Expansion Joints.

1. Shall be constructed with board filler and sealed at top. Board filler must be perpendicular to plane of concrete slab. Alignment of joint shall not vary more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

F. Concrete Placing and Finishing.

1. Concrete not placed as herein prescribed within 90 minutes after mixing shall be rejected.

2. Concrete shall not be placed when temperature is below 40°F and falling, but may be placed when the temperature is above 35°F and rising, the temperature being taken in the shade and away from artificial heat.

3. Concrete shall not be placed before the time of sunrise, and shall not be placed later than will permit the finishing of the pavement during sufficient natural light.

4. Concrete shall be consolidated by a mechanical vibrator to remove all voids. Special care shall be exercised in placing and spading concrete against forms and at all joints to prevent the forming of honeycombs and voids and to prevent displacement of steel reinforcements and load transmission devices.

5. The concrete shall be struck off with an approved strike-off screed to such elevation that when consolidated and finished, the surface of pavement shall conform to the required section and grade. In no case shall the maximum ordinate from a 10-foot straight edge to the pavement be greater than 1/8 inch.

6. The strike template shall be moved forward with a combined transverse and longitudinal motion in the direction the work is progressing, maintaining the template in contact with the forms, and maintaining a slight excess of material on front of the cutting edge.

7. After completion of a strike-off, consolidation and transverse screeding, a hand-operated longitudinal float shall be operated to test and level the surface to the required grade.

8. Workmen shall operate the float from approved bridges riding in the forms and spanning the pavement. The longitudinal float shall be held in contact with the surface and parallel to the centerline, and operated with short longitudinal strokes while being passed from one side of the pavement to the other. If contact with the pavement is not made at all points, additional concrete shall be placed if required, and screeded, and the float shall be used to produce a satisfactory surface. After a section has been smoothed so that the float maintains contact with the surface at all points being passed from one side to the other, the bridges may be moved forward half the length of the float, and the operations repeated.

9. After completion of the straightedge testing, a pass with a burlap drag shall be made as soon as construction operations permit and before the water sheen has disappeared from the surface. As many passes of the drag as required to produce the desired surface texture shall follow this.

10. After completion of dragging and about the time the concrete becomes hard, the edge of the slab and joints shall be left smooth and true to line.

G. Curing.



1. Concrete pavement shall be cured by protecting it against excessive loss of moisture for a period of not less than 72 hours from the beginning of curing operation. Immediately after finishing operations have been completed, the entire surface of the newly laid concrete shall be covered and cured. Special care should be exercised to keep spraying curing compound out of pavement joints.

3.2 APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALING COMPOUND

A. Joints shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose scale, dirt, dust and curing compound. When necessary, existing joint material shall be removed to the depth as shown on the plans.

B. Joints shall be filled to the full depth of the joint opening. Pouring shall be done in a neat and workman like manner to give satisfactory results. The sealer shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendation. The joint sealant shall be below the top of the pavement surface.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

A. Concrete Test Specimens

1. A laboratory testing agency for the tests will be selected and paid for by the Owner. A laboratory technician will prepare the necessary concrete test cylinders.

2. Test cylinders for compressive strength tests will be taken and cured in accordance with ASTM C31 and tested in accordance with ASTM C39. At least 3 cylinders shall be made for each day for each 100 cy of concrete, or fraction thereof, placed.

3. Concrete pavement that does not meet the specified requirements based on the laboratory compressive strength tests shall be removed, replaced, and re-tested at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Testing of Concrete Surface

1. After finishing is complete and while the concrete is still workable, the surface shall be tested for trueness with an approved 10-foot steel straightedge. The straightedge shall be operated from one side of the pavement placed parallel to the pavement center line and passed across the slab to reveal any high spots or depressions. The straightedge shall be advanced along the pavement in successive stages of not more than ½ its length. A tolerance of 1/8” in 10 feet shall be met. Any correction of the surface required shall be accomplished by adding concrete if required and by operating the longitudinal float over the area. The surface test with straightedge shall then be repeated.

3.4 OPENING PAVEMENT TO TRAFFIC

A. The pavement shall be closed to all traffic, including vehicles of the Contractor, until the concrete is at least 7 days old or has attained a minimum average of 2,000 psi compressive strength. Repair any damage to the pavement prior to acceptance by Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. This does not relieve the Contractor from the normal liabilities and maintenance responsibilities, implied or otherwise, for the pavement or other items.



CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334000- 1

SECTION 33 40 00

STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide the required material and workmanship for the installation of storm sewer pipe, culverts, grate inlets and appurtenances, including headwalls.


A. SECTION 31 10 00 - SITE PREPARATION AND DEMOLITION

B. SECTION 31 23 33 - TRENCH EXCAVATION

C. SECTION 31 23 34 - TRENCH BACKFILL

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C76 - Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe.

B. ASTM C433 – Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe using Rubber Gaskets.

C. ASTM C850 / AASHTO M273 – Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains and Sewers

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Pipe Certification: Manufacturer’s certifications that pipe meet the requirements of these specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STORM SEWER PIPE

A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: Provide reinforced concrete pipe, which conforms to ASTM C76, Class III Wall B.

B. Plastic Pipe:

1. Provide Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Schedule 40 pipe, which conforms with ASTM D1784 and ASTM D2466.



2.2 CONCRETE PIPE JOINT MATERIAL

A. Cold Compound Joints: For concrete pipe sections carrying rainfall runoff, furnish pipe joint material.

1. Cold-applied preformed plastic gasket. Plastic gasket shall be produced from blends of refined hydrocarbon resins and plasticizing compounds reinforced with inert material filler and shall contain no solvents, irritating fumes, or obnoxious odors.

2. Expanded cellular rubber gaskets. Expanded cellular rubber gaskets shall be produced from a blend of nitrile and vinyl polymers meeting the physical requirements of ASTM D1056, Class 2C1.

B. Rubber Gasket Joints: For concrete pipe sections subject to hydrostatic tests. Rubber Gasket shall be of the O-ring design and shall meet requirements of ASTM C443. Joint shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendation.

2.3 JUNCTION BOXES

A. Precast Concrete Junction Boxes: Precast concrete junction boxes shall comply with ASTM C850. Joints for precast concrete junction boxes shall be rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C443.

B. Cast-in-place Concrete Junction Boxes: Provide reinforced concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

C. Iron Castings: Gray Cast Iron, ASTM A48, Class 20, free of imperfections, with holes in cover lean and free from plugs.

1. Machine bearing surfaces of manhole frames and covers to provide even bearing in any position in which the manhole cover is seated on the frame.

2. Cast the words “STORM SEWER” on each manhole cover. 3. Provide bolt down pressure type covers with seal consisting of either a 1/16 in. copper

gasket or 1/4 in. diameter neoprene O-ring gasket between cover and frame.

D. Pipe Connectors: Pipe connectors shall comply with ASTM C923.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION

A. Excavation, backfill, and compaction of the trench shall be in accordance with Sections 31 23 33 - TRENCH EXCAVATION and 31 23 34 - TRENCH BACKFILL. Install detector tape with all storm sewer piping.

3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Sewers and Culverts: Do not place pipe until the excavation has been completed, the bottom of the trench shaped, proper bedding material placed, and the line and grade have been obtained. Lay pipe accurately to line and grade in a straight line with spigot end of the pipe pointing in the direction of flow. Fit pipes together and match them so that when laid,



the pipe will form a sewer or culvert with smooth and uniform invert except where there is a pipe size change, in which case, the crowns of the larger and smaller pipes shall be at the same elevation and a concrete collar used to make the connection, unless otherwise shown.

3.3 CONCRETE PIPE CULVERT JOINT INSTALLATION

A. The joint assembly shall be made according to the recommendations of the gasket manufacturer meeting ASTM C443. Water tight joints will be required.
